1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 0
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 0
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 0
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
116 \notefontcolor #0000ff
133 \paragraph_separation skip
136 \quotes_style english
140 \paperpagestyle default
141 \tracking_changes true
142 \output_changes false
146 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
147 \author 274215730 "scott"
148 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
202 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1805 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1807 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1808 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1816 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1819 \begin_layout Standard
1820 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1821 you further to control the display.
1826 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1827 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1833 option keeps it in the current view state.
1834 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1839 \begin_inset space ~
1842 3, the subsections of sections
1843 \begin_inset space ~
1846 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1851 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1852 \begin_inset space ~
1856 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1866 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1869 \begin_layout Standard
1876 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1877 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1891 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1892 So, for example, you can move section
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1900 2.4 or after section
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1906 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1919 (or the corresponding key bindings
1927 ) you can change the level of sections.
1928 So you can for example make section
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1933 \begin_inset space ~
1937 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_layout Standard
1944 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1945 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1948 \begin_layout Subsection
1949 Horizontal Scrolling
1950 \begin_inset Index idx
1953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1954 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1962 \begin_layout Standard
1964 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1970 \begin_inset space \space{}
1974 \begin_inset space ~
1977 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1978 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1979 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1983 \begin_layout Standard
1984 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1988 \begin_layout Itemize
1990 is used on a small tablet computer
1993 \begin_layout Itemize
1994 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2006 \begin_inset space ~
2019 \begin_layout Itemize
2020 Math constructs with long command names
2023 \begin_layout Standard
2024 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2025 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2027 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2028 windows so that table
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2035 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2040 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2042 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2043 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2046 \begin_layout Standard
2047 \begin_inset Float table
2053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2054 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2059 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2063 Horizontal scrolling test.
2071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2073 \begin_inset Tabular
2074 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2075 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2077 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2078 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2120 \begin_layout Section
2121 Input/Word Completion
2122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2124 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2129 \begin_inset Index idx
2132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2139 \begin_inset Index idx
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2173 \begin_layout Standard
2175 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2177 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2178 is used to propose completions.
2181 \begin_layout Standard
2182 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2185 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2190 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2201 \begin_inset space ~
2206 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2210 \begin_inset space ~
2215 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2216 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2220 \begin_inset space ~
2226 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2227 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2228 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2229 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2232 \begin_layout Standard
2234 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2235 completions available.
2240 key to accept a proposed completion.
2241 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2242 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2243 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2250 \begin_layout Standard
2251 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2252 ing options for text.
2253 The special math option
2257 enables characters to be composed.
2258 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2259 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2262 , you can then input the characters
2263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2274 to a formula to get it.
2275 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2276 of the math toolbar.
2277 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2281 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2282 's installation folder.
2283 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2292 \begin_layout Section
2294 \begin_inset Index idx
2297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2304 \begin_inset Index idx
2307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2336 \begin_inset Index idx
2339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2370 \begin_layout Standard
2371 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2385 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2388 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2392 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2393 \begin_inset space ~
2397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2399 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2406 \begin_layout Standard
2410 \begin_inset space ~
2418 \begin_inset space ~
2439 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2443 \begin_layout Labeling
2444 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2448 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2449 LatexCommand nomenclature
2451 description "Tabulator key"
2458 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2460 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2461 \begin_inset space ~
2465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2467 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2478 , especially section
2479 \begin_inset space ~
2483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2485 reference "subsec:Lists"
2491 If you are still confused, look in the
2496 \begin_inset Newline newline
2504 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2505 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2509 \begin_layout Labeling
2510 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2514 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2515 LatexCommand nomenclature
2517 description "Escape key"
2525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2532 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2533 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2536 \begin_layout Labeling
2537 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2543 \begin_inset space ~
2547 \begin_inset space ~
2554 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2555 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2559 \begin_layout Standard
2560 There are three modifier keys:
2563 \begin_layout Labeling
2564 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2582 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2583 LatexCommand nomenclature
2585 description "Control key"
2590 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2591 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2595 \begin_layout Itemize
2604 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2607 \begin_layout Itemize
2616 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2619 \begin_layout Itemize
2628 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2632 \begin_layout Labeling
2633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2651 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2652 LatexCommand nomenclature
2654 description "Shift key"
2659 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2660 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2663 \begin_layout Labeling
2664 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2682 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2683 LatexCommand nomenclature
2685 description "Alt or Meta key"
2690 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2691 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2692 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2698 \begin_inset Newline newline
2701 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2703 menu accelerator keys
2706 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2707 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2711 \begin_layout Standard
2712 For example, the sequence
2713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2719 \begin_inset space ~
2723 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2756 \begin_inset space ~
2762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2772 \begin_layout Standard
2777 manual lists all other things bound to the
2785 \begin_layout Standard
2786 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2788 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2789 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2790 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2791 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2792 The \SpecialChar LyX
2793 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2794 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2795 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2797 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2813 followed by a capital
2820 \begin_layout Chapter
2823 \begin_inset Index idx
2826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2836 \begin_layout Section
2838 \begin_inset Index idx
2841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2850 \begin_layout Subsection
2854 \begin_layout Standard
2855 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2856 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2857 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2858 numbering schemes, and so on.
2859 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2860 and format the title of your document differently.
2863 \begin_layout Standard
2868 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2869 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2870 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2871 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2872 picks one for you by default.
2873 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2876 \begin_layout Subsection
2878 \begin_inset Index idx
2881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2890 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2897 \begin_layout Standard
2898 You can select a class using the
2900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2901 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2905 \begin_inset Index idx
2908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2915 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2923 \begin_layout Standard
2924 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Article for basic articles
2933 \begin_layout Description
2934 Report for basic reports
2937 \begin_layout Description
2938 Book for writing a book
2941 \begin_layout Description
2942 Letter for US-style letters
2945 \begin_layout Standard
2946 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2947 only uses if you have installed
2948 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2949 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2950 distributions will include
2952 Here are some of the classes.
2953 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2955 Special Document Classes
2964 \begin_layout Description
2965 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2968 \begin_layout Description
2969 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2973 \begin_layout Description
2974 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2978 \begin_layout Description
2979 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2980 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2981 There are three article layouts available.
2982 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2983 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2984 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2985 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2990 sequential numbering
2991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2995 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2996 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2997 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3000 \begin_layout Description
3001 Beamer Layout for presentations
3004 \begin_layout Description
3005 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3006 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3007 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3008 with \SpecialChar LyX
3012 \begin_layout Description
3013 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3016 \begin_layout Description
3018 \begin_inset space ~
3021 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3024 \begin_layout Description
3025 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3028 \begin_layout Description
3029 Foils Used to make transparencies
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3034 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3035 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3036 with \SpecialChar LyX
3040 \begin_layout Description
3041 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3042 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3049 \begin_layout Description
3050 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3055 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3056 (Is used by this document.)
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3063 \begin_layout Description
3064 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3067 \begin_layout Description
3072 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3073 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3075 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3079 \begin_layout Description
3080 Slides Used to make transparencies
3083 \begin_layout Description
3085 \begin_inset space ~
3088 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3089 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3092 \begin_layout Description
3093 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3096 \begin_layout Standard
3097 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3099 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3101 Special Document Classes
3108 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3109 of the document classes.
3112 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3116 \begin_layout Standard
3117 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3119 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3120 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3122 \begin_inset Index idx
3125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3142 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3143 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3145 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3148 \begin_layout Standard
3151 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3156 , are highly specialized.
3158 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3159 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3160 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3161 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3162 by some document class.
3163 There are just too many of them.
3164 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3167 \begin_layout Standard
3168 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3177 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3178 document class for a new file.
3180 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3183 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3190 manual for information on how to install them.
3191 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3197 \begin_layout Standard
3198 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3199 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3200 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3201 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3202 class files to be used for dissertation
3203 s submitted to those universities.
3204 The \SpecialChar LyX
3205 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3207 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3211 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3217 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3224 name "subsec:Modules"
3229 \begin_inset Index idx
3232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3241 \begin_layout Standard
3242 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3243 chosen document class.
3244 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3245 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3252 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3256 \begin_inset Index idx
3259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3266 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3270 \begin_layout Standard
3271 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3272 packages or file format converters that are not always
3273 installed by default.
3275 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3276 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3277 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3278 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3280 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3281 file without the missing prerequisites.
3282 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3283 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3286 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3290 \begin_inset Index idx
3293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3294 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3300 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3305 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3308 \begin_layout Standard
3309 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3317 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3319 will advise you about these things.
3327 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3331 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3336 \begin_inset Index idx
3339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3340 Document ! Local Layout
3348 \begin_layout Standard
3349 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3350 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3351 : They are intended to be used in
3352 a variety of different documents.
3353 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3354 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3355 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3356 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3357 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3359 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3377 manual for information on how to use it.
3380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3384 \begin_layout Standard
3385 Each class has a default set of options.
3386 Here's a quick table describing them:
3389 \begin_layout Standard
3390 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3398 \begin_inset Tabular
3399 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3400 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3401 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3402 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3403 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3404 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3405 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3859 \begin_layout Standard
3860 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 You're probably also wondering what
3868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3880 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3881 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3886 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3891 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3901 headings, there are also
3909 headings, and so on.
3910 We will describe these headings fully in section
3911 \begin_inset space ~
3915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3917 reference "subsec:Headings"
3924 \begin_layout Subsection
3926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3928 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3933 \begin_inset Index idx
3936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3943 \begin_inset Index idx
3946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3955 \begin_layout Standard
3956 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3965 \begin_inset space ~
3973 \begin_inset space ~
3978 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3980 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3981 doesn't support special options you want to
3982 use for your document.
3983 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3984 -class and its options, you have to read
3988 \begin_layout Standard
3992 \begin_inset space ~
3999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4005 \begin_inset space ~
4010 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4011 You can choose between the following five options:
4014 \begin_layout Labeling
4015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4020 Use default page style of current class.
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4029 No page numbers or headings.
4032 \begin_layout Labeling
4033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4041 \begin_layout Labeling
4042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4048 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4049 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4050 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4053 \begin_layout Labeling
4054 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4059 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4060 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4066 \begin_inset Index idx
4069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4071 -packages ! fancyhdr
4077 How they are defined is explained in section
4078 \begin_inset space ~
4082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4084 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4091 \begin_layout Standard
4092 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4093 \begin_inset space ~
4097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4099 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4106 \begin_layout Subsection
4107 Paper Size and Orientation
4108 \begin_inset Index idx
4111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4112 Document ! Paper size
4118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4120 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4127 \begin_layout Standard
4128 You can find the following options in the menu
4131 \begin_inset space ~
4138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4142 \begin_inset Index idx
4145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4154 \begin_layout Labeling
4155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4159 \begin_inset space ~
4164 What size paper to print on.
4169 \begin_layout Itemize
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4196 US letter, US legal, US executive
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Labeling
4213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4218 To choose whether to output as
4229 \begin_layout Labeling
4230 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4234 \begin_inset space ~
4239 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4240 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4243 \begin_layout Subsection
4245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4247 name "subsec:Margins"
4252 \begin_inset Index idx
4255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4262 \begin_inset Index idx
4265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4274 \begin_layout Standard
4275 Paper margins are set in the menu
4277 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4281 \begin_inset Index idx
4284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4293 \begin_layout Standard
4294 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4295 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4296 the paper format and the font size into account.
4299 \begin_layout Subsection
4303 \begin_layout Standard
4304 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4310 That includes the paragraph environments.
4311 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4312 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4313 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4315 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4324 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4326 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4327 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4328 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4331 \begin_layout Section
4332 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4333 \begin_inset Index idx
4336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4337 Paragraph ! Indentation
4345 \begin_layout Subsection
4347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4349 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4356 \begin_layout Standard
4357 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4358 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4361 \begin_layout Standard
4362 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4363 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4364 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4365 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4369 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4375 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4376 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4377 language than English.
4379 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4382 \begin_layout Standard
4383 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4384 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4385 into \SpecialChar LyX
4387 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4390 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4392 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4393 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4394 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4401 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4402 goes to produce a printable file.
4407 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4409 gives you the ability globally to change
4413 these pre-coded spacings.
4414 We will explain more later.
4417 \begin_layout Subsection
4418 Paragraph Separation
4419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4421 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4426 \begin_inset Index idx
4429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4430 Paragraph ! Separation
4438 \begin_layout Standard
4446 \begin_inset space ~
4454 \begin_inset space ~
4461 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4465 \begin_inset Index idx
4468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4474 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4477 \begin_layout Subsection
4481 \begin_layout Standard
4482 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4487 \begin_inset space ~
4492 dialog and toggle the
4495 \begin_inset space ~
4500 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4503 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4507 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4508 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4512 \begin_layout Standard
4513 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4514 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4517 \begin_layout Subsection
4519 \begin_inset Index idx
4522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4523 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4531 \begin_layout Standard
4534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4538 \begin_inset Index idx
4541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4550 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4554 \begin_inset space ~
4563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4564 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4570 \begin_inset Index idx
4573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4575 -packages ! setspace
4580 installed to use this feature.
4585 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4587 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4589 \begin_inset space ~
4594 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4595 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4598 \begin_layout Section
4599 Paragraph Environments
4600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4602 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4607 \begin_inset Index idx
4610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4611 Paragraph ! Environments
4617 \begin_inset Index idx
4620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4621 Paragraph environments|(
4629 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_layout Standard
4634 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4637 \begin_layout Standard
4646 } \SpecialChar ldots
4656 \begin_inset Newline newline
4659 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4661 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4662 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4663 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4672 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4675 \begin_layout Standard
4676 A paragraph environment is simply a
4677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4684 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4685 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4686 scheme, labels, and so on.
4687 Additionally, you can
4688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4695 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4696 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4697 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4698 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4700 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4702 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4705 \begin_layout Standard
4706 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4707 \begin_inset Graphics
4708 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4714 at the left end of the toolbar.
4716 will change the environment of the
4720 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4721 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4722 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4726 \begin_layout Standard
4735 create a new paragraph using the
4739 paragraph environment.
4741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4748 because if you are in one of these environments:
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Standard
4795 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4799 , rather than resetting it to
4804 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4805 \begin_inset space ~
4809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4811 reference "sec:Nesting"
4818 \begin_layout Subsection
4822 \begin_layout Standard
4823 The default paragraph environment is
4828 It creates a plain paragraph.
4830 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4831 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4832 this manual) are in the
4839 \begin_layout Standard
4840 You can nest a paragraph using the
4844 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4852 \begin_layout Subsection
4854 \begin_inset Index idx
4857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4866 \begin_layout Standard
4867 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4868 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4877 for thanks or contact information.
4878 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4879 places all of this on a separate page
4880 along with today's date.
4881 For other types of documents, the title
4882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4889 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4893 \begin_layout Standard
4895 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4909 Here's how you use them:
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4913 Put the title of your document in the
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 Put the author name in the
4928 \begin_layout Itemize
4929 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4930 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4936 Note that using this environment is optional.
4937 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4938 will automatically insert today's date.
4939 If you don't want a date, use the option
4941 Suppress default date on front page
4945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4946 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4948 \begin_inset space ~
4956 \begin_layout Standard
4957 You can use footnotes to insert
4958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 or contact information.
4968 \begin_layout Subsection
4970 \begin_inset Index idx
4973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4982 name "subsec:Headings"
4989 \begin_layout Standard
4990 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4992 takes care of the numbering for you.
4995 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4997 \begin_inset Index idx
5000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5001 Section headings ! Numbered
5009 \begin_layout Standard
5010 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5014 \begin_layout Enumerate
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Standard
5058 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5059 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5060 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5064 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5065 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5066 You group the book into chapters.
5068 does a similar grouping:
5071 \begin_layout Itemize
5076 is divided into either
5087 \begin_layout Itemize
5099 \begin_layout Itemize
5111 \begin_layout Itemize
5123 \begin_layout Itemize
5135 \begin_layout Itemize
5147 \begin_layout Standard
5148 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5156 Not all document types use the
5160 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5165 is the top-level heading.
5173 \begin_layout Standard
5178 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5179 labels it with its number,
5180 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5182 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5196 \begin_inset Index idx
5199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5200 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5208 \begin_layout Standard
5209 The unnumbered section headings have a
5210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5217 at the end of their name.
5218 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5219 the table of contents, see section
5220 \begin_inset space ~
5224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5234 Changing the Numbering
5235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5237 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5244 \begin_layout Standard
5245 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5246 in the Table of Contents.
5247 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5249 Just as certain classes start with
5263 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5273 This is something you can change.
5276 \begin_layout Standard
5279 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5283 \begin_inset Index idx
5286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5295 \begin_inset space ~
5299 \begin_inset space ~
5304 you will see two counters.
5309 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5310 numbers a section heading.
5311 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5316 Short Titles of Headings
5317 \begin_inset Index idx
5320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5321 Section headings ! Short titles
5327 \begin_inset Argument 1
5330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5339 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5346 \begin_layout Standard
5347 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5348 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5349 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5350 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5355 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5356 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5357 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5358 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5363 \begin_inset space ~
5369 This will insert a box labeled
5370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5374 \begin_inset space ~
5378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5381 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5382 This also works for captions inside floats.
5383 There can only be one short title per title.
5386 \begin_layout Standard
5387 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5394 \begin_layout Standard
5395 The following information applies to all section headings:
5398 \begin_layout Itemize
5399 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5402 \begin_layout Itemize
5403 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5406 \begin_layout Itemize
5407 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5410 \begin_layout Itemize
5411 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5414 \begin_layout Subsection
5418 \begin_layout Standard
5420 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5434 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5435 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5436 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5437 the text they contain.
5438 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5446 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5449 \begin_layout Standard
5450 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5459 when you start a new paragraph.
5460 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5464 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5465 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5466 have to change back to the
5470 environment yourself.
5473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5482 \begin_inset Index idx
5485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5494 \begin_layout Standard
5495 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5496 time for the differences.
5505 are identical except for one difference:
5509 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5518 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5521 \begin_layout Standard
5522 Here's an example of the
5535 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5537 See – no indentation!
5541 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5542 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5543 the other paragraph.
5546 \begin_layout Standard
5547 Here's another example, this time in the
5554 \begin_layout Quotation
5560 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5561 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5562 the first line, then
5566 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5570 you were quoting other text.
5573 \begin_layout Quotation
5574 Here's a new paragraph.
5575 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5576 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5579 \begin_layout Standard
5580 As the examples show,
5584 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5585 They should put quotes in the
5590 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5594 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5599 \begin_inset Index idx
5602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5609 \begin_inset Index idx
5612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5628 \begin_layout Standard
5633 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5639 \begin_inset Newline newline
5642 Which I did not rehearse!
5646 It could be much worse.
5647 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5649 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5650 indented a bit more than the first.
5651 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5657 \begin_inset Newline newline
5660 And make things look fine
5661 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 arg "newline-insert newline"
5673 \begin_layout Standard
5678 does not indent both margins.
5679 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5680 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5683 arg "newline-insert newline"
5689 \begin_layout Subsection
5691 \begin_inset Index idx
5694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5710 \begin_layout Standard
5712 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5722 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5723 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5732 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5733 lets you provide your own label.
5734 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5735 describing some general features of all four of them.
5738 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5742 \begin_layout Standard
5743 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5745 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5746 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5755 reset the environment to
5759 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5760 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5761 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5765 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5769 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5776 \begin_layout Standard
5777 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5778 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5779 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5781 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5782 you read all of section
5783 \begin_inset space ~
5787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5789 reference "sec:Nesting"
5796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5798 \begin_inset Index idx
5801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5817 \begin_layout Standard
5818 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5822 paragraph environment.
5823 It has the following properties:
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5831 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5836 \begin_layout Itemize
5837 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5841 \begin_layout Itemize
5842 The items can have any length.
5844 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5845 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5852 \begin_layout Itemize
5857 environment inside another
5861 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5865 \begin_layout Itemize
5866 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5869 \begin_layout Itemize
5871 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5874 \begin_layout Itemize
5876 \begin_inset space ~
5880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5882 reference "sec:Nesting"
5886 for a full explanation of nesting.
5890 \begin_layout Standard
5891 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5900 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5903 \begin_layout Standard
5904 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5905 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5908 \begin_layout Itemize
5909 The label for the first level
5913 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5917 \begin_layout Itemize
5918 The label for the second level is a dash.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5927 \begin_layout Itemize
5928 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5932 \begin_layout Itemize
5933 Back out to the third level.
5937 \begin_layout Itemize
5938 Back to the second level.
5942 \begin_layout Itemize
5943 Back to the outermost level.
5946 \begin_layout Standard
5947 These are the default labels for an
5952 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5957 dialog in the submenu
5962 \begin_inset Index idx
5965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5971 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5975 \begin_layout Standard
5976 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5977 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5979 \begin_inset space ~
5983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5985 reference "sec:Nesting"
5992 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5994 \begin_inset Index idx
5997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6006 name "sec:Enumerate"
6013 \begin_layout Standard
6018 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6019 It has these properties:
6022 \begin_layout Enumerate
6023 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6028 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6032 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 environment resets the counter to one.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6058 \begin_layout Enumerate
6059 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6060 Items can have any length.
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6067 \begin_layout Enumerate
6068 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6071 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6076 \begin_layout Standard
6085 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6087 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6088 labels the four different levels in an
6095 \begin_layout Enumerate
6096 The first level of an
6100 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6104 \begin_layout Enumerate
6105 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6109 \begin_layout Enumerate
6110 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6114 \begin_layout Enumerate
6115 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6118 \begin_layout Enumerate
6119 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Back to the third level
6129 \begin_layout Enumerate
6130 Back to the second level.
6134 \begin_layout Enumerate
6135 Back to the outermost level.
6138 \begin_layout Standard
6139 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6143 environment, see section
6144 \begin_inset space ~
6148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6150 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6155 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6159 \begin_layout Standard
6160 There is more to nesting
6164 environments than we've stated here.
6165 You should read section
6166 \begin_inset space ~
6170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6172 reference "sec:Nesting"
6176 to learn more about nesting.
6179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6181 \begin_inset Index idx
6184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6193 \begin_layout Standard
6194 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6198 list has no fixed label.
6199 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6208 of the first line as the label.
6212 \begin_layout Description
6213 Example: This is an example of the
6220 \begin_layout Standard
6222 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6235 it is meant that the first usage of the
6239 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6241 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6249 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6255 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6257 \begin_inset space ~
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6269 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6273 for more information.) Here is an example:
6276 \begin_layout Description
6278 \begin_inset space ~
6281 Example: This one shows how to use a
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6296 \begin_layout Description
6297 Usage: You should use the
6301 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6302 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6304 It's not a good idea to use a
6308 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6309 You're better off using
6321 paragraphs into them.
6324 \begin_layout Description
6325 Nesting: You can nest
6329 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6333 \begin_layout Standard
6334 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6335 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6336 them from the first line.
6339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6341 \begin_inset Index idx
6344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6353 \begin_layout Standard
6358 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6359 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6363 \begin_layout Standard
6372 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6374 Here are its properties:
6377 \begin_layout Labeling
6378 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6380 \begin_inset space ~
6383 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6392 of each line as the item label.
6397 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6398 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6399 space as described above.
6402 \begin_layout Labeling
6403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6404 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6405 uses different margins for the item label and the
6406 body of the item text.
6407 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6408 label width plus a little extra space.
6412 \begin_layout Labeling
6413 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6415 \begin_inset space ~
6418 width \SpecialChar LyX
6419 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6420 If the label width is larger, the label
6421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6428 into the first line.
6429 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6430 margin of the rest of the item text.
6433 \begin_layout Labeling
6434 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6436 \begin_inset space ~
6439 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6444 environment has the same left margin.
6445 \begin_inset Newline newline
6448 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6451 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6453 \begin_inset space ~
6458 dialog (toolbar button
6461 arg "layout-paragraph"
6468 \begin_inset space ~
6473 determines the default label width.
6474 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6483 multiple times instead.
6484 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6494 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6497 \begin_inset space ~
6502 every time you alter a label in a
6507 \begin_inset Newline newline
6510 The predefined default width is the length of
6511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6519 \begin_inset space ~
6525 \begin_layout Standard
6530 list the same way as the
6534 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6540 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6544 \begin_layout Standard
6549 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6550 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6552 \begin_inset space ~
6556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6558 reference "sec:Nesting"
6562 to learn about nesting.
6565 \begin_layout Standard
6566 There is yet another feature of the
6570 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6571 left-justifies the item labels by
6573 You can use additional
6577 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6578 justifies the item label.
6583 are documented in section
6584 \begin_inset space ~
6588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6590 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6595 Here are some examples:
6598 \begin_layout Labeling
6599 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6600 Left The default for
6607 \begin_layout Labeling
6608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6609 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6616 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6619 \begin_layout Labeling
6620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6621 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6625 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6635 \begin_layout Subsection
6637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6639 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6644 \begin_inset Index idx
6647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6656 \begin_layout Standard
6657 The features described in this section require that the module
6659 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6661 is loaded in the document settings.
6662 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6668 \begin_inset Index idx
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6673 -packages ! enumitem
6681 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6682 Custom Enumerate Lists
6683 \begin_inset Index idx
6686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6695 \begin_layout Standard
6697 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6703 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6704 There you add the command
6707 \begin_layout Standard
6715 \begin_layout Standard
6727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6728 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6729 Code, look at section
6730 \begin_inset space ~
6734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6736 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6749 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6756 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6757 For capital Roman numerals replace
6769 in the command above.
6770 For Arabic numerals use
6778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6785 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6800 \begin_layout Standard
6802 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6810 You can only number 26
6811 \begin_inset space ~
6814 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6822 \begin_layout Standard
6823 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6824 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6827 \begin_layout Standard
6828 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6831 \begin_layout Enumerate
6832 \begin_inset Argument 1
6835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6861 \begin_layout Enumerate
6862 \begin_inset Argument 1
6865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6893 \begin_layout Enumerate
6894 \begin_inset Argument 1
6897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6921 \begin_layout Enumerate
6922 \begin_inset Argument 1
6925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6951 \begin_layout Standard
6952 For this list these commands were used:
6955 \begin_layout Standard
6966 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6982 \begin_inset Newline newline
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6999 makes the label emphasized and
7008 \begin_layout Standard
7009 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7017 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7018 lists until you change the definition.
7026 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7028 \begin_inset Index idx
7031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7032 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7040 \begin_layout Standard
7041 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7044 \begin_layout Enumerate
7045 \begin_inset Argument 1
7048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7067 \begin_inset Note Note
7070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7071 goes back to default numbering
7079 \begin_layout Enumerate
7083 \begin_layout Standard
7087 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7091 \begin_layout Standard
7092 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7097 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7098 to indicate that it is a resumed
7099 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7100 , but in the output.
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7104 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7112 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7121 \begin_layout Standard
7122 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7124 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7125 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7126 of a normal enumeration.
7127 There, insert the command
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7141 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7145 \begin_layout Enumerate
7149 \begin_layout Enumerate
7153 \begin_layout Standard
7154 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7157 \begin_layout Enumerate
7158 \begin_inset Argument 1
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7177 This enumeration starts at 4
7180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7182 \begin_inset Index idx
7185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7194 \begin_layout Standard
7195 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7197 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7200 \begin_layout Itemize
7204 \begin_layout Itemize
7205 with standard spacing
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7209 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7211 Add there the command
7215 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7218 \begin_layout Itemize
7219 \begin_inset Argument 1
7222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7241 \begin_layout Itemize
7245 \begin_layout Itemize
7249 \begin_layout Standard
7250 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7257 \begin_inset Index idx
7260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7262 -packages ! enumitem
7268 For more information see its documentation,
7269 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7279 \begin_layout Standard
7280 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7282 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7283 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7287 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7290 \begin_layout Enumerate
7291 \begin_inset Argument 1
7294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7302 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7315 \begin_layout Enumerate
7316 with negative indentation
7319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7320 Further Customization
7321 \begin_inset Index idx
7324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7325 Lists ! Customization
7333 \begin_layout Standard
7334 You can also change the style of description lists.
7338 \begin_layout Standard
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7345 changes the description label font, the command
7348 \begin_layout Standard
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7355 sets the list style.
7358 \begin_layout Standard
7359 An example where the command
7362 \begin_layout Standard
7367 itshape, style=nextline
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7374 \begin_layout Description
7376 \begin_inset space ~
7380 \begin_inset Argument 1
7383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7389 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7391 itshape, style=nextline
7401 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7402 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7406 \begin_layout Description
7408 \begin_inset space ~
7411 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7412 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7413 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7416 \begin_layout Standard
7417 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7423 \begin_inset Index idx
7426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7428 -packages ! enumitem
7434 For more information see its documentation
7435 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7445 \begin_layout Subsection
7447 \begin_inset Index idx
7450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7459 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7461 \begin_inset space ~
7464 Address: An Overview
7467 \begin_layout Standard
7468 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7469 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7477 \begin_inset space ~
7483 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7484 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7485 gags on the document.
7486 In contrast, you can use the
7493 \begin_inset space ~
7498 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7499 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7503 \begin_layout Standard
7504 Of course, you're not limited to using
7511 \begin_inset space ~
7520 \begin_inset space ~
7525 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7526 some European academic papers.
7529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7533 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7540 \begin_layout Standard
7545 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7546 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7550 \begin_inset space ~
7555 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7556 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7557 Here's an example of each:
7560 \begin_layout Right Address
7562 \begin_inset Newline newline
7566 \begin_inset Newline newline
7570 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 When is it? What is today?
7576 \begin_layout Standard
7580 \begin_inset space ~
7586 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7588 the largest block of text on a single line.
7589 Here's an example of the
7596 \begin_layout Address
7598 \begin_inset Newline newline
7601 Where do I send this
7602 \begin_inset Newline newline
7605 Your post office and country
7608 \begin_layout Standard
7609 As you can see, both
7616 \begin_inset space ~
7621 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7626 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7627 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7633 This makes sense, since
7641 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7642 Thus, you have to use
7649 arg "newline-insert newline"
7654 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7655 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7657 \begin_inset space ~
7661 \begin_inset space ~
7666 ) to start a new line in an
7673 \begin_inset space ~
7681 \begin_layout Subsection
7685 \begin_layout Standard
7686 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7687 or list of references.
7689 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7694 \begin_inset Index idx
7697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7706 \begin_layout Standard
7711 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7712 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7713 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7714 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7728 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7729 The book document classes ignores the
7733 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7737 in a letter document class.
7740 \begin_layout Standard
7745 environment does several things for you.
7746 First, it puts the centered label
7747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7755 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7757 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7758 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7759 the subsequent text.
7760 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7762 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7766 \begin_layout Standard
7767 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7771 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7772 The new paragraph will still be in the
7777 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7778 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7781 \begin_layout Standard
7782 \begin_inset Float figure
7787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7789 \begin_inset Graphics
7790 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7798 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7803 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7824 \begin_layout Standard
7825 We would love to demonstrate the
7829 environment, but since this document is in the
7830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7837 class, we can't do this.
7838 We inserted it therefore as figure
7839 \begin_inset space ~
7843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7845 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7850 If you have never heard of an
7851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7858 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7863 \begin_inset Index idx
7866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7875 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7882 \begin_layout Standard
7887 environment is used to list references.
7888 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7889 only use it at the end of the document.
7901 \begin_layout Standard
7902 When you first open a
7906 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7907 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 depending on the document class.
7924 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7925 Each paragraph of the
7929 environment is a bibliography entry.
7934 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7935 Each new paragraph is still in the
7942 \begin_layout Standard
7943 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7944 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7946 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7948 handling, have a look at section
7949 \begin_inset space ~
7953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7955 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7962 \begin_layout Subsection
7963 Special Environments
7966 \begin_layout Standard
7968 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7969 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7972 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7977 \begin_inset Index idx
7980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7990 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7997 \begin_layout Standard
8003 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8005 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8010 key as a fixed whitespace.
8014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8027 \begin_inset space ~
8032 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8050 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8053 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8056 arg "newline-insert newline"
8073 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8074 So, when you finish using the
8079 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8080 Also, you can nest the
8085 environment inside of others.
8088 \begin_layout Standard
8089 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8092 \begin_layout Itemize
8096 arg "newline-insert newline"
8099 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8104 \begin_inset space \space{}
8114 arg "newline-insert newline"
8120 \begin_layout Itemize
8124 arg "newline-insert newline"
8134 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8140 \begin_layout Itemize
8141 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8142 You must put at least one
8146 in any line you want blank.
8147 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8151 \begin_layout Itemize
8152 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8156 since that will insert
8161 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8164 arg "self-insert \""
8170 \begin_layout Standard
8174 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8178 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8182 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 printf("Hello World!
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8200 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8204 \begin_layout Standard
8205 This is just the standard
8206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8217 \begin_layout Standard
8223 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8225 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8226 as if you used a typewriter.
8227 \begin_inset Index idx
8230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8231 Paragraph environments|)
8236 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8239 Program Code Listings
8244 \begin_inset space ~
8252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8256 \begin_inset Index idx
8259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8268 \begin_layout Standard
8273 environment is similar to the
8278 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8279 computer console text.
8284 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8298 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8299 you can have empty lines.
8312 \begin_layout Itemize
8313 have a certain language and a text style
8316 \begin_layout Itemize
8317 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8318 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8319 and \SpecialChar TeX
8323 \begin_layout Standard
8324 Because of these properties
8328 works like a typewriter.
8332 \begin_layout Verbatim
8336 \begin_layout Verbatim
8339 The following 2 lines are empty:
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8346 \begin_layout Verbatim
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8351 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8356 \begin_layout Standard
8361 environment is identical to
8365 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8366 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8373 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8377 \begin_layout Section
8378 Nesting Environments
8379 \begin_inset Index idx
8382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8383 Nesting ! Environments
8389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8398 \begin_layout Subsection
8402 \begin_layout Standard
8404 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8406 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8408 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8410 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8422 \begin_layout Enumerate
8426 \begin_layout Enumerate
8431 \begin_layout Enumerate
8435 \begin_layout Enumerate
8440 \begin_layout Enumerate
8444 \begin_layout Standard
8445 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8446 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8448 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8450 \begin_inset space ~
8454 \begin_inset space ~
8462 \begin_inset space ~
8466 \begin_inset space ~
8471 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8473 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8476 arg "depth-increment"
8482 arg "depth-decrement"
8496 arg "depth-increment"
8502 arg "depth-decrement"
8506 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8507 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8512 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8513 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8514 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8515 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8516 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8519 \begin_layout Standard
8520 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8522 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8524 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8527 \begin_layout Subsection
8528 What You Can and Can't Nest
8531 \begin_layout Standard
8532 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8533 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8537 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8538 than a simple yes or no.
8539 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8543 Completely unnestable
8546 \begin_layout Itemize
8547 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8552 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8556 \begin_layout Standard
8557 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8558 environments have them:
8561 \begin_layout Description
8562 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8563 Can't nest into them.
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Description
8600 \begin_inset space ~
8603 Nestable You can nest them.
8604 You can nest other things into them.
8608 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Description
8671 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8672 You can't nest anything into them.
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8758 \begin_inset space ~
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8771 \begin_layout Standard
8772 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8780 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8790 \begin_inset space ~
8793 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8794 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8795 nested section headings violate this.
8803 \begin_layout Subsection
8804 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8805 \begin_inset Index idx
8808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8809 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8817 \begin_layout Standard
8818 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8819 affected by nesting anyhow.
8823 \begin_layout Itemize
8827 \begin_layout Itemize
8831 \begin_layout Itemize
8835 \begin_layout Standard
8837 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8845 Figures and tables in
8849 are not affected by this.
8854 Have a look at section
8855 \begin_inset space ~
8859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8861 reference "sec:Floats"
8865 for more information about
8872 \begin_layout Standard
8874 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8875 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8879 \begin_layout Standard
8880 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8888 of its own, it behaves just like a
8889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8896 paragraph environment.
8897 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8901 \begin_layout Standard
8902 Here's an example with a table:
8905 \begin_layout Enumerate
8910 \begin_layout Enumerate
8911 This is (a) and it's nested.
8915 \begin_layout Standard
8916 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8922 \begin_layout Standard
8924 \begin_inset Tabular
8925 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8926 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8927 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8928 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9012 \begin_layout Standard
9013 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9022 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9030 \begin_layout Standard
9031 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9034 \begin_layout Enumerate
9039 \begin_layout Enumerate
9040 This is (a) and it's nested.
9044 \begin_layout Standard
9045 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9051 \begin_layout Standard
9053 \begin_inset Tabular
9054 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9055 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9056 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9057 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9141 \begin_layout Standard
9142 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9148 \begin_layout Enumerate
9155 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 \begin_layout Standard
9163 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9171 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9174 \begin_layout Enumerate
9179 \begin_layout Enumerate
9180 This is (a) and it's nested.
9183 \begin_layout Standard
9184 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9190 \begin_layout Standard
9192 \begin_inset Tabular
9193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9194 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9195 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9281 \begin_layout Standard
9282 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9288 \begin_layout Enumerate
9290 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9297 \begin_layout Enumerate
9301 \begin_layout Standard
9302 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9308 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9309 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9313 \begin_layout Subsection
9314 Usage and General Features
9317 \begin_layout Standard
9318 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9319 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9328 is the innermost possible depth.
9329 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9332 \begin_layout Enumerate
9333 level #1 – outermost
9337 \begin_layout Enumerate
9342 \begin_layout Enumerate
9347 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 \begin_layout Itemize
9357 \begin_layout Itemize
9366 \begin_layout Standard
9367 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9368 both of them in the example.
9369 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9379 For example, if we tried to nest another
9384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9391 , we would get errors.
9394 \begin_layout Subsection
9396 \begin_inset Index idx
9399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9408 \begin_layout Standard
9409 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9410 We have several examples of nested environments.
9411 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9416 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9419 \begin_layout Labeling
9420 \labelwidthstring MMM
9421 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9430 \begin_layout Labeling
9431 \labelwidthstring MMM
9432 #2-a This is level #2.
9433 We created it by using
9436 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9442 arg "depth-increment"
9449 \begin_layout Labeling
9450 \labelwidthstring MMM
9451 #3-a This is level #3.
9452 This time, we just enter
9459 arg "depth-increment"
9463 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9467 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9473 arg "depth-increment"
9480 \begin_layout Standard
9485 environment, nested inside of
9486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9494 So, it's at level #4.
9495 We did this by entering
9498 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9504 arg "depth-increment"
9507 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9512 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9528 \begin_layout Standard
9533 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9536 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9542 \begin_layout Labeling
9543 \labelwidthstring MMM
9544 #4-a This is level #4.
9548 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9551 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9556 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9560 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9565 keep nesting things inside
9566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9577 \begin_layout Labeling
9578 \labelwidthstring MMM
9579 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9584 \begin_layout Labeling
9585 \labelwidthstring MMM
9586 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9587 and this is level #6.
9588 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9592 \begin_layout Labeling
9593 \labelwidthstring MMM
9594 #5-b Back to level #5.
9598 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9604 arg "depth-decrement"
9611 \begin_layout Labeling
9612 \labelwidthstring MMM
9616 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9622 arg "depth-decrement"
9625 , we're back at level #4.
9629 \begin_layout Labeling
9630 \labelwidthstring MMM
9631 #3-b Back to level #3.
9632 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9636 \begin_layout Labeling
9637 \labelwidthstring MMM
9638 #2-b Back to level #2.
9643 \begin_layout Labeling
9644 \labelwidthstring MMM
9645 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9646 After this sentence, we will enter
9650 and change the paragraph environment back to
9657 \begin_layout Standard
9658 We could have also used the
9674 environment in place of the
9679 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9683 Example 2: Inheritance
9686 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9687 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9690 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9699 arg "depth-increment"
9703 \begin_inset Newline newline
9706 which, we will change to the
9714 \begin_layout Enumerate
9719 environment, at level #2.
9722 \begin_layout Enumerate
9723 Notice how the nested
9727 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9731 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9735 \begin_layout Standard
9736 We ended this example by entering
9741 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9745 and reset the nesting depth by using
9748 arg "depth-decrement"
9754 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9755 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9764 \begin_inset Argument 1
9767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9768 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9776 \begin_layout Enumerate
9777 This is level #1, in an
9781 paragraph environment.
9782 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9786 \begin_layout Enumerate
9791 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9797 arg "depth-increment"
9801 Now, what happens if we nest an
9805 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9806 label be? An asterisk?
9810 \begin_layout Itemize
9820 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9821 So, its label is a bullet.
9822 (We got here by using
9825 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9831 arg "depth-increment"
9834 , then changing the environment to
9842 \begin_layout Itemize
9843 Here's level #4, produced using
9846 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9852 arg "depth-increment"
9856 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9861 \begin_layout Enumerate
9864 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9869 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9873 , because we are in the
9881 environment (that is, it is an
9896 \begin_layout Enumerate
9901 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9902 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9906 \begin_layout Enumerate
9907 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9910 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9913 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9920 arg "depth-decrement"
9923 to decrease the depth after the next
9926 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9933 \begin_layout Enumerate
9935 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9940 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9943 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9947 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9957 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9962 reset the counter for the label.
9966 \begin_layout Enumerate
9970 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9976 arg "depth-decrement"
9979 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9980 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9981 into the twofold-nested
9989 \begin_layout Enumerate
9990 The same thing happens if we do another
9993 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9999 arg "depth-decrement"
10002 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10005 \begin_layout Standard
10006 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10011 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10022 The number of other
10026 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10033 The same rule applies for the
10037 environment, as well.
10040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10041 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10044 \begin_layout Enumerate
10045 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10046 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10047 the same detail with how we did it.
10056 \begin_layout Standard
10064 arg "depth-increment"
10071 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10072 the example in parentheses someplace.
10073 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10074 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10075 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10079 \begin_layout Enumerate
10084 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10088 \begin_layout Verse
10089 Now we will add verse.
10090 \begin_inset Newline newline
10093 It will get much worse.
10094 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 arg "depth-increment"
10114 \begin_layout Verse
10115 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10116 \begin_inset Newline newline
10119 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10120 \begin_inset Newline newline
10126 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10134 \begin_layout Verse
10135 Here comes a table:
10139 \begin_layout Standard
10140 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10146 \begin_layout Standard
10148 \begin_inset Tabular
10149 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10150 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10151 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10152 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10237 \begin_layout Verse
10241 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10251 arg "depth-increment"
10257 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10263 \begin_inset Newline newline
10271 arg "depth-decrement"
10278 \begin_layout Enumerate
10283 : level #1) This is another item.
10284 Note that selecting a
10288 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10289 3 times to put the table inside the
10297 \begin_layout Quotation
10298 We're now ending the
10302 list and changing to
10307 We're still at level #1.
10308 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10309 The next set of paragraphs is a
10310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10317 We will nest both the
10324 \begin_inset space ~
10329 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10333 for the letter body.
10337 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10340 to preserve the depth.
10341 Remember that you need to use
10344 arg "newline-insert newline"
10347 to create multiple lines inside the
10354 \begin_inset space ~
10364 \begin_layout Right Address
10366 \begin_inset Newline newline
10369 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10370 \begin_inset Newline newline
10376 \begin_layout Address
10378 \begin_inset space ~
10384 \begin_layout Quotation
10385 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10389 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10390 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10391 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10392 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10393 as soon as possible.
10394 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10397 \begin_layout Quotation
10398 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10399 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10400 with your order, along with payment.
10403 \begin_layout Quotation
10404 We thank you again for your patience.
10407 \begin_layout Address
10409 \begin_inset Newline newline
10416 \begin_layout Quotation
10417 That ends that example!
10420 \begin_layout Standard
10421 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10422 gives you a lot of power with just
10424 We could have easily nested an
10445 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10448 \begin_layout Subsection
10450 \begin_inset Index idx
10453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10454 Nesting ! Separation
10460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10462 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10469 \begin_layout Standard
10470 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10472 For example you need two different enumerations:
10475 \begin_layout Enumerate
10480 \begin_layout Enumerate
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10489 \begin_layout Standard
10490 \begin_inset Separator plain
10496 \begin_layout Itemize
10502 \begin_layout Standard
10503 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10509 \begin_layout Enumerate
10513 \begin_layout Enumerate
10517 \begin_layout Enumerate
10521 \begin_layout Standard
10522 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10523 list item and use the menu
10525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10526 Start New Environment
10529 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10530 ) and behind it the new list.
10533 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10534 Start New Parent Environment
10536 only appears if the item is nested.
10537 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10541 \begin_layout Standard
10542 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10543 (red arrow in LyX).
10544 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10545 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10548 \begin_layout Standard
10549 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10552 arg "paragraph-break"
10559 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10562 \begin_layout Section
10563 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10564 \begin_inset Index idx
10567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10576 \begin_layout Standard
10577 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10578 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10580 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10581 be broken at the end of a line.
10582 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10586 \begin_layout Subsection
10588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10590 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10595 \begin_inset Index idx
10598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10607 \begin_layout Standard
10608 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10609 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10610 ) not to break the line at
10612 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10615 \begin_layout Quote
10616 Further documentation is given in section
10617 \begin_inset Newline newline
10621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10623 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10631 \begin_layout Standard
10632 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10647 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10656 A protected space is set with
10658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10659 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10661 \begin_inset space ~
10669 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10675 \begin_layout Subsection
10677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10679 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10684 \begin_inset Index idx
10687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10688 Spacing ! Horizontal
10696 \begin_layout Standard
10697 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10700 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10704 The length units are listed in Appendix
10705 \begin_inset space ~
10709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10711 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10718 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10722 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10727 \begin_inset Index idx
10730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10731 Spaces ! Inter-word
10739 \begin_layout Standard
10740 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10741 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10742 at the ends of sentences.
10743 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10744 automatically takes care about this.
10745 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10746 followed by a period; see section
10747 \begin_inset space ~
10751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10753 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10758 To insert a normal space, select
10760 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10761 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10763 \begin_inset space ~
10771 arg "space-insert normal"
10777 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10781 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10786 \begin_inset Index idx
10789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10798 \begin_layout Standard
10800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10807 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10816 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10817 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10818 inside abbreviations:
10821 \begin_layout Quote
10823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10827 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10830 \begin_layout Standard
10831 or between values and units.
10832 Compare for example this:
10833 \begin_inset Newline newline
10837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10841 \begin_inset Newline newline
10844 10 kg (normal space
10847 \begin_layout Standard
10848 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10851 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10853 \begin_inset space ~
10861 arg "space-insert thin"
10867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10871 \begin_layout Standard
10872 You can also insert the following space types:
10875 \begin_layout Description
10877 \begin_inset space ~
10881 \begin_inset space ~
10884 space A line with a
10885 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10889 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10896 negative thin space between the arrows.
10899 \begin_layout Description
10901 \begin_inset space ~
10905 \begin_inset space ~
10908 space A line with a
10909 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10913 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10920 negative medium space between the arrows.
10923 \begin_layout Description
10925 \begin_inset space ~
10929 \begin_inset space ~
10932 space A line with a
10933 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10937 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10944 negative thick space between the arrows.
10947 \begin_layout Description
10949 \begin_inset space ~
10953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10957 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10961 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10965 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10969 \begin_inset space ~
10973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10976 em) space between the arrows.
10979 \begin_layout Description
10981 \begin_inset space ~
10985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10989 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10993 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10997 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11001 \begin_inset space ~
11005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11008 em) space between the arrows.
11011 \begin_layout Description
11013 \begin_inset space ~
11017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11021 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11025 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11029 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11033 \begin_inset space ~
11037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11040 em) space between the arrows.
11043 \begin_layout Description
11045 \begin_inset space ~
11049 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11053 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11058 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11065 cm space between the arrows.
11068 \begin_layout Standard
11070 \begin_inset space ~
11074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11076 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11080 lists the different space sizes.
11083 \begin_layout Standard
11084 \begin_inset Float table
11089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11090 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11095 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11099 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 \begin_inset Tabular
11110 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11111 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11112 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11113 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11229 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11388 \begin_inset Index idx
11391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11400 \begin_layout Standard
11401 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11402 feature for adding extra space
11403 in a uniform fashion.
11404 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11405 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11406 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11407 equally between themselves.
11410 \begin_layout Standard
11411 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11414 \begin_layout Quote
11416 This is on the left side
11417 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11420 This is on the right
11423 \begin_layout Quote
11426 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 \begin_layout Quote
11439 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11443 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_layout Standard
11454 That was an example in the
11460 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11464 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11468 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11471 is one in a standard paragraph.
11472 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11476 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11479 \begin_layout Standard
11480 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11483 \begin_inset space ~
11488 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11491 \begin_layout Standard
11493 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11497 \begin_inset space ~
11503 \begin_layout Standard
11505 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11515 \begin_layout Standard
11517 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11521 \begin_inset space ~
11527 \begin_layout Standard
11529 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11533 \begin_inset space ~
11539 \begin_layout Standard
11541 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11545 \begin_inset space ~
11551 \begin_layout Standard
11553 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11557 \begin_inset space ~
11563 \begin_layout Standard
11564 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11572 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11576 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11578 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11579 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11583 option in the space dialog.
11591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11595 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11600 \begin_inset Index idx
11603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11612 \begin_layout Standard
11613 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11614 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11617 \begin_layout Standard
11618 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11621 What is correct English?:
11622 \begin_inset Newline newline
11626 \begin_inset Newline newline
11630 \begin_inset space ~
11633 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
11638 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11649 \begin_inset Newline newline
11653 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11664 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11670 \begin_layout Standard
11672 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11677 \begin_inset space ~
11681 \begin_inset space ~
11685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11689 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11692 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11696 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11702 \begin_inset space ~
11706 \begin_inset space ~
11710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11713 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11722 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11723 That is why it is named
11724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11732 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11733 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11737 \begin_layout Subsection
11739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11741 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11746 \begin_inset Index idx
11749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11758 \begin_layout Standard
11759 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11762 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11764 \begin_inset space ~
11770 There you find the following sizes:
11773 \begin_layout Standard
11786 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11787 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11792 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11794 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11795 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11797 \begin_inset space ~
11803 \begin_inset Index idx
11806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11807 Document ! Settings
11812 for the paragraph separation.
11813 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11824 \begin_layout Standard
11830 \begin_inset Index idx
11833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11839 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11840 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11845 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11846 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11855 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11864 s are described in section
11865 \begin_inset space ~
11869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11871 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11880 If there are several
11884 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11885 You can therefore use
11889 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11892 \begin_layout Standard
11897 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11898 \begin_inset space ~
11902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11904 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11911 \begin_layout Standard
11912 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11922 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11923 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11935 \begin_layout Subsection
11936 Paragraph Alignment
11937 \begin_inset Index idx
11940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11941 Paragraph ! Alignment
11949 \begin_layout Standard
11950 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11952 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11955 dialog (toolbar button
11958 arg "layout-paragraph"
11962 There are five possibilities:
11965 \begin_layout Itemize
11973 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11979 \begin_layout Itemize
11987 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11993 \begin_layout Itemize
12001 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12007 \begin_layout Itemize
12015 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12021 \begin_layout Itemize
12029 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12035 \begin_layout Standard
12036 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12037 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12038 the left and right margins.
12039 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12042 \begin_layout Standard
12044 This paragraph is right aligned,
12047 \begin_layout Standard
12049 this one is centered,
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12054 this one is left aligned.
12057 \begin_layout Subsection
12059 \begin_inset Index idx
12062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12063 Page breaks ! Forced
12069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12071 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12078 \begin_layout Standard
12079 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12080 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12081 force a page break where you want one.
12082 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12083 is good at page breaking.
12084 Only if you use a lot of
12088 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12089 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12092 \begin_layout Standard
12093 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12094 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12098 have to change the page breaking.
12101 \begin_layout Standard
12102 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12104 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12107 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12109 \begin_inset space ~
12115 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12118 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12125 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12127 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12128 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12131 \begin_layout Standard
12132 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12133 at the top of a page.
12134 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12136 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12137 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12138 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12142 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12146 to learn more about
12153 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12157 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12162 \begin_inset Index idx
12165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12166 Page breaks ! Clear
12174 \begin_layout Standard
12175 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12176 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12177 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12178 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12179 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12182 \begin_layout Standard
12183 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12186 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12188 \begin_inset space ~
12194 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12197 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12199 \begin_inset space ~
12203 \begin_inset space ~
12208 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12209 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12212 \begin_layout Subsection
12214 \begin_inset Index idx
12217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12226 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12233 \begin_layout Standard
12234 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12236 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12239 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12241 \begin_inset space ~
12245 \begin_inset space ~
12253 arg "newline-insert newline"
12257 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12260 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12262 \begin_inset space ~
12266 \begin_inset space ~
12274 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12277 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12279 This is useful to avoid
12280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12287 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12290 \begin_layout Standard
12291 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12292 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12294 very good at line breaking.
12295 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12296 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12297 \begin_inset space ~
12301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12303 reference "sec:Quote"
12308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12310 reference "sec:Verse"
12315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12317 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12324 \begin_layout Subsection
12326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12328 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12333 \begin_inset Index idx
12336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12345 \begin_layout Standard
12347 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12358 \begin_layout Standard
12362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12363 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12365 \begin_inset space ~
12370 you can insert horizontal lines.
12371 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12372 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12373 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12376 \begin_layout Standard
12378 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12389 \begin_layout Section
12390 Characters and Symbols
12393 \begin_layout Standard
12394 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12395 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12396 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12404 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12408 for information on how this is done.
12411 \begin_layout Standard
12412 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12417 dialog via the menu
12419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12420 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12426 \begin_layout Standard
12427 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12435 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12436 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12438 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12446 \begin_layout Section
12447 Fonts and Text Styles
12448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12450 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12457 \begin_layout Subsection
12459 \begin_inset Index idx
12462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12471 \begin_layout Standard
12472 There are two types of fonts:
12475 \begin_layout Description
12477 \begin_inset space ~
12481 \begin_inset Index idx
12484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12490 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12495 characters) in the font.
12496 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12497 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12498 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12499 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12500 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12501 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12502 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12503 \begin_inset Newline newline
12506 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12507 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12508 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12509 sizes than at small ones.
12510 \begin_inset Newline newline
12524 \begin_inset space ~
12532 \begin_layout Description
12534 \begin_inset space ~
12538 \begin_inset Index idx
12541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12547 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12548 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12549 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12550 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12551 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12552 image manipulation program.
12553 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12554 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12555 \begin_inset space ~
12558 pixels high up to 34
12559 \begin_inset space ~
12562 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12563 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12564 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12566 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12567 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12568 \begin_inset Newline newline
12571 Bitmap fonts are named
12574 \begin_inset space ~
12579 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12583 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12584 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12585 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12586 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12587 use scalable fonts.
12590 \begin_layout Standard
12591 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12594 \begin_layout Standard
12595 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12596 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12597 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12598 font to emphasize text, you use an
12599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12607 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12609 In \SpecialChar LyX
12610 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12614 \begin_layout Subsection
12617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12619 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12626 \begin_layout Standard
12627 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12628 used its own fonts.
12629 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12630 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12633 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12635 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12636 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12637 to a word processor.
12638 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12639 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 files are very portable across
12641 different machines.
12642 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 has increased a lot
12644 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12647 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12649 \begin_inset space ~
12653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12655 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12660 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 code in the document
12662 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12665 \begin_layout Standard
12666 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 engines that are also able directly
12668 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12670 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12672 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12674 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12675 that is installed on your system.
12676 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12679 \begin_layout Standard
12680 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12688 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12689 es; so you might have to experiment.
12697 \begin_layout Subsection
12698 Document Font and Font size
12699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12701 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12706 \begin_inset Index idx
12709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12716 \begin_inset Index idx
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12728 \begin_layout Standard
12729 You can set the document fonts in the
12731 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12735 \begin_inset Index idx
12738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 Document ! Settings
12749 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12750 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12753 \begin_inset space ~
12762 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12764 \begin_inset space ~
12767 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12770 \begin_layout Standard
12775 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12776 This requires that you use
12788 as the output format, i.
12789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12793 \begin_inset space \space{}
12796 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12797 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12798 installed (see section
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12805 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12810 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12812 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12813 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12815 \begin_inset space ~
12818 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12819 cannot determine the family.
12820 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12821 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12824 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12827 \begin_layout Standard
12828 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12829 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12834 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12840 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12841 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12849 \begin_inset space ~
12855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12868 European Computer Modern
12871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12878 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12881 \begin_layout Standard
12890 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12891 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12896 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12899 \begin_inset space ~
12904 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12910 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12911 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12914 \begin_layout Itemize
12918 \begin_inset space ~
12923 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12936 \begin_inset space ~
12941 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12942 community in order to replace
12946 as the default font.
12947 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12948 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12951 \begin_inset space ~
12964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12965 One difference is improved kerning.
12973 \begin_layout Itemize
12977 \begin_inset space ~
12981 \begin_inset space ~
12986 fonts in (the rare) case that
12989 \begin_inset space ~
12994 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13009 Virtual means that it
13010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13021 -glyphs from other fonts.
13022 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13044 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13050 \begin_inset Index idx
13053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13055 -packages ! aeguill
13060 with the document preamble line
13061 \begin_inset Newline newline
13068 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13069 \begin_inset Newline newline
13074 will fix the guillemet problem.
13079 and that accented characters are not
13083 glyph, but built of
13087 characters, the accent and the letter.
13088 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13094 If you search for example for the French word
13095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13102 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13111 and not for the glyph
13112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13116 \begin_inset space ~
13120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13126 \begin_layout Itemize
13127 If you do not like the look of
13135 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13146 \begin_inset space ~
13156 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13157 \begin_inset space ~
13160 serif and typewriter fonts,
13164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13165 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13181 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13186 \begin_inset space \space{}
13194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13198 \begin_inset space \space{}
13204 \begin_inset space ~
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13222 but you can also select your own.
13223 \begin_inset Newline newline
13226 The differences between roman,
13229 \begin_inset space ~
13238 fonts are explained in section
13239 \begin_inset space ~
13243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13245 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13250 \begin_inset Newline newline
13256 \begin_inset space ~
13261 was originally designed for newspapers.
13262 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13263 into the small newspaper columns.
13267 \begin_inset space ~
13272 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13275 \begin_layout Standard
13276 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13289 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13294 depends on the class you are using.
13295 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13298 \begin_layout Standard
13299 Note that the font size is the
13304 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13305 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13306 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13307 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13310 \begin_inset space ~
13316 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13323 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13330 \begin_layout Standard
13334 \begin_inset space ~
13339 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13341 \begin_inset space ~
13344 serif or typewriter.
13349 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13359 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13362 \begin_layout Standard
13367 LaTeX font encoding
13369 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13370 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13376 \begin_inset Index idx
13379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13381 -packages ! fontenc
13387 \begin_inset space ~
13391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13393 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13398 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13399 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13406 \begin_layout Standard
13407 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13409 Use Old Style Figures
13413 Use True Small Caps
13416 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13419 Use Old Style Figures
13421 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13423 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13431 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13435 Use True Small Caps
13437 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13438 of scaled capitals.
13439 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13440 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13443 \begin_layout Standard
13448 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13449 a font to display the script characters.
13453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13454 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13460 \begin_inset Index idx
13463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13470 So this has no effect for the document language
13484 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13488 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13496 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13501 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13502 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13504 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13506 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13509 dialog, see section
13510 \begin_inset space ~
13514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13516 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13528 \begin_layout Subsection
13532 \begin_layout Standard
13533 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13534 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13536 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13537 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13538 choose a math font in the dialog
13540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13544 \begin_inset Index idx
13547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13548 Document ! Settings
13554 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13555 automatically selects a math font.
13556 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13557 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13566 \begin_inset space ~
13572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13577 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13578 document font is available.
13581 \begin_layout Standard
13582 Note that the math font will not be used for
13586 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13592 or by the insertion of the command
13599 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13600 \begin_inset space ~
13604 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13605 while the math characters do not.
13607 \begin_inset space ~
13610 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13613 \begin_inset space ~
13621 \begin_inset space ~
13626 in the document font settings.
13629 \begin_layout Standard
13630 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13631 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13632 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13633 font (in most cases
13634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13640 \begin_inset space ~
13646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13649 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13650 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13658 \begin_inset space ~
13664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13670 \begin_layout Subsection
13671 Using Different Character Styles
13672 \begin_inset Index idx
13675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13682 \begin_inset Index idx
13685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13694 \begin_layout Standard
13695 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13696 automatically changes the character style for certain
13697 paragraph environments.
13699 supports two character styles,
13708 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13712 \begin_layout Standard
13717 style, do one of the following:
13720 \begin_layout Itemize
13721 click on the toolbar button
13730 \begin_layout Itemize
13731 use the key binding
13740 \begin_layout Standard
13741 These commands are all toggles.
13746 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13749 \begin_layout Standard
13750 One typically uses the
13754 style for proper names.
13756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13763 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13771 \begin_layout Standard
13772 A more widely used character style is the
13777 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13784 \begin_layout Itemize
13785 clicking on the toolbar button
13794 \begin_layout Itemize
13795 using the keybindings
13804 \begin_layout Standard
13809 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13811 use a different font.
13814 \begin_layout Standard
13815 We've been using the
13819 style all over the place in this document.
13820 Here's one more example:
13823 \begin_layout Quotation
13826 Do not overuse character styles!
13829 \begin_layout Standard
13830 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13831 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13832 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13833 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13837 \begin_layout Standard
13838 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13846 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13848 \begin_inset space ~
13851 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13857 arg "dialog-show character"
13863 \begin_layout Subsection
13864 Fine-Tuning with the
13869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13871 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13876 \begin_inset Index idx
13879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13888 \begin_layout Standard
13889 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13891 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13892 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13893 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13894 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13895 from ordinary dialog.
13898 \begin_layout Standard
13899 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13900 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13901 \begin_inset Newline newline
13904 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13905 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13908 \begin_layout Standard
13909 To use custom character styles, open the
13911 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13913 \begin_inset space ~
13916 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13919 dialog or press the toolbar button
13922 arg "dialog-show character"
13926 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13927 font property that you can choose.
13928 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13931 \begin_inset space ~
13936 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13941 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13942 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13943 environments all at once.
13946 \begin_layout Standard
13947 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13950 \begin_inset space ~
13962 \begin_layout Labeling
13963 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13977 The possible options are:
13981 \begin_layout Labeling
13982 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13987 This is the Roman font family.
13988 Normally a serif font.
13989 It's also the default family.
13999 \begin_layout Labeling
14000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14004 \begin_inset space ~
14011 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14023 \begin_layout Labeling
14024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14031 This is the Typewriter font family.
14037 arg "font-typewriter"
14046 \begin_layout Labeling
14047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14052 This corresponds to the print weight.
14057 \begin_layout Labeling
14058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14063 This is the Medium font series.
14064 It's also the default series.
14067 \begin_layout Labeling
14068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14075 This is the Bold font series.
14088 \begin_layout Labeling
14089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14094 As the name implies.
14099 \begin_layout Labeling
14100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14105 This is the Upright font shape.
14106 It's also the default shape.
14109 \begin_layout Labeling
14110 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14124 s the Italic font shape
14130 \begin_layout Labeling
14131 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14138 This is the Slanted font shape
14140 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14141 , this is different from italic).
14144 \begin_layout Labeling
14145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14149 \begin_inset space ~
14156 This is the Small caps font shape
14163 \begin_layout Labeling
14164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14169 Alters the text color.
14170 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14174 \begin_inset space ~
14179 , which means that the document default color set in
14181 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14182 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14188 \begin_inset space ~
14193 is used, you can choose between
14270 \begin_inset Index idx
14273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14282 \begin_layout Labeling
14283 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14288 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14289 the language of the document.
14290 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14291 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14293 \begin_inset Newline newline
14296 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14298 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14299 When using the spell checking (see section
14300 \begin_inset space ~
14304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14306 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14310 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14313 \begin_layout Labeling
14314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14319 Alters the size of the font.
14320 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14321 proportional to the document font size.
14322 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14323 the details, but a general description of what
14329 \begin_layout Labeling
14330 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14351 arg "font-size tiny"
14357 \begin_layout Labeling
14358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14379 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14385 \begin_layout Labeling
14386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14407 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14413 \begin_layout Labeling
14414 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14435 arg "font-size small"
14441 \begin_layout Labeling
14442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14456 It's also the default size.
14460 arg "font-size normal"
14466 \begin_layout Labeling
14467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14488 arg "font-size large"
14494 \begin_layout Labeling
14495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14516 arg "font-size larger"
14522 \begin_layout Labeling
14523 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14544 arg "font-size largest"
14550 \begin_layout Labeling
14551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14572 arg "font-size huge"
14578 \begin_layout Labeling
14579 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14600 arg "font-size giant"
14606 \begin_layout Labeling
14607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14612 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14632 arg "font-size increase"
14638 \begin_layout Labeling
14639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14644 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14664 arg "font-size decrease"
14671 \begin_layout Standard
14676 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14677 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14679 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14680 — use those instead.
14681 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14684 \begin_layout Labeling
14685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14690 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14695 \begin_layout Labeling
14696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14703 This is text with emphasize on
14706 This might seem like the same as
14710 , but it is actually a bit different.
14716 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14718 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14721 \begin_layout Labeling
14722 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14729 This is text with Underbar on.
14735 arg "font-underline"
14741 \begin_inset Newline newline
14746 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14747 when you could not change fonts.
14748 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14749 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14750 because some people
14754 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14757 \begin_layout Labeling
14758 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14762 \begin_inset space ~
14769 This is text with Double underbar on.
14775 arg "font-underunderline"
14779 \begin_inset Newline newline
14782 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14783 about double underbar.
14786 \begin_layout Labeling
14787 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14791 \begin_inset space ~
14798 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14804 arg "font-underwave"
14808 \begin_inset Newline newline
14811 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14812 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14815 \begin_layout Labeling
14816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14823 This is text with Strikeout on.
14829 arg "font-strikeout"
14833 \begin_inset Newline newline
14836 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14837 changed in the meantime.
14840 \begin_layout Labeling
14841 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14848 This is text with Noun on.
14855 , this is a logical attribute.
14856 Normally it's equivalent to
14859 \begin_inset space ~
14868 \begin_layout Standard
14869 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14870 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14872 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14874 \begin_inset space ~
14877 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14883 arg "dialog-show character"
14886 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14887 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14890 arg "textstyle-apply"
14894 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14898 \begin_layout Standard
14899 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14906 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14907 (suppose you just set the shape to
14908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14926 \begin_inset space ~
14938 \begin_layout Standard
14939 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14947 \begin_inset space ~
14959 \begin_layout Itemize
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14972 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14990 \begin_inset Newline newline
14994 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15008 \begin_inset Note Note
15011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15012 For more on phantoms see section
15013 \begin_inset space ~
15017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15019 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15029 \begin_inset Newline newline
15035 \begin_layout Itemize
15040 fonts use characters with serifs.
15041 These are the small
15042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15049 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15050 The following example shows the difference:
15051 \begin_inset Newline newline
15055 \begin_inset Newline newline
15060 text without serifs
15063 \begin_inset Newline newline
15066 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15067 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15074 \begin_layout Itemize
15079 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15080 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15081 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15084 \begin_layout Standard
15085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15092 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15093 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15096 \begin_inset space ~
15101 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15102 the property to be removed.
15103 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15104 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15105 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15123 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15124 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15132 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15136 \begin_inset space ~
15141 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15152 If you, for example, set
15153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15171 \begin_inset space ~
15176 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15185 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15188 \begin_layout Standard
15189 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15190 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15193 \begin_layout Section
15194 Printing and Previewing
15197 \begin_layout Subsection
15201 \begin_layout Standard
15202 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15203 using \SpecialChar LyX
15204 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15205 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15206 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15207 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15209 Additional Features
15214 \begin_layout Standard
15216 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15219 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15220 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15221 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15224 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15225 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15226 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15227 to turn your writing into printable output.
15228 This happens in two stages:
15231 \begin_layout Enumerate
15232 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15233 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15235 a file with the extension,
15236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15250 \begin_layout Enumerate
15251 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15252 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15253 to use the commands in the
15257 file to produce printable output.
15260 \begin_layout Subsection
15261 Output file formats
15262 \begin_inset Index idx
15265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15274 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15281 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15282 Simple text (ASCII)
15283 \begin_inset Index idx
15286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15287 File formats ! ASCII
15295 \begin_layout Standard
15296 This file type has the extension
15297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15309 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15313 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15320 \begin_layout Standard
15321 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15323 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15324 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15326 \begin_inset space ~
15332 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15333 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15334 bibliography (section
15335 \begin_inset space ~
15339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15341 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15346 If your document includes such material, use
15348 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15349 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15351 \begin_inset space ~
15355 \begin_inset space ~
15359 \begin_inset space ~
15367 \begin_inset space ~
15371 \begin_inset space ~
15377 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15378 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15384 \begin_inset Index idx
15387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15388 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15397 \begin_layout Standard
15398 This file type has the extension
15399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15410 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15413 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15414 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15415 -Errors or to process it manually
15416 with console commands.
15417 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15418 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15419 's temporary directory whenever you
15420 view or export your document.
15423 \begin_layout Standard
15424 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15425 -file using the menu
15427 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15428 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15432 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15433 export variants are explained in section
15434 \begin_inset space ~
15438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15440 reference "subsec:Export"
15447 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15449 \begin_inset Index idx
15452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15461 \begin_layout Standard
15462 This file type has the extension
15463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15483 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15484 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15485 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15489 \begin_layout Standard
15490 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15491 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15492 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15493 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15494 when you view the DVI.
15495 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15498 \begin_layout Standard
15499 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15501 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15502 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15507 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15508 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15510 \begin_inset space ~
15516 The latter option uses the program
15518 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15527 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15528 font access (see section
15529 \begin_inset space ~
15533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15535 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15540 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15541 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15548 \begin_inset Index idx
15551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15552 File formats ! PostScript
15560 \begin_layout Standard
15561 This file type has the extension
15562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15574 PostScript was developed by the company
15578 as a printer language.
15579 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15581 PostScript can be seen as a
15582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15585 programming language
15586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15589 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15594 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15601 \begin_inset Index idx
15604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15606 -packages ! pstricks
15616 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15619 \begin_layout Standard
15620 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15624 Encapsulated PostScript
15625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15628 (EPS, file extension
15629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15641 As \SpecialChar LyX
15642 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15643 convert them in the background to EPS.
15644 If, for example, you have 50
15645 \begin_inset space ~
15648 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15650 \begin_inset space ~
15653 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15654 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15656 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15657 EPS to avoid this problem.
15660 \begin_layout Standard
15661 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15663 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15664 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15672 \begin_inset Index idx
15675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15682 \begin_inset Index idx
15685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15694 \begin_layout Standard
15695 This file type has the extension
15696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15712 Portable Document Format
15713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15720 was derived from PostScript.
15721 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15730 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15731 looks exactly the same.
15734 \begin_layout Standard
15735 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15739 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15743 (JPG, file extension
15744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15771 Portable Network Graphics
15772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15775 (PNG, file extension
15776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15788 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15789 converts them in the
15790 background to one of these formats.
15791 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15792 will slow down your workflow.
15793 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15796 \begin_layout Standard
15797 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15799 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15805 \begin_layout Description
15807 \begin_inset space ~
15810 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15814 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15817 \begin_layout Description
15819 \begin_inset space ~
15826 ) This uses the program
15828 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15831 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15834 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15837 is a new engine, derived from
15841 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15842 access (see section
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15849 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15854 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15855 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15860 \begin_layout Description
15862 \begin_inset space ~
15869 ) This uses the program
15874 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15880 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15881 font access (see section
15882 \begin_inset space ~
15886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15888 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15893 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15894 vertically written Japanese.
15897 \begin_layout Description
15899 \begin_inset space ~
15902 (cropped) This is the same as
15905 \begin_inset space ~
15910 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15911 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15912 to generate good-looking
15913 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15916 \begin_layout Description
15918 \begin_inset space ~
15921 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15925 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15929 \begin_layout Description
15931 \begin_inset space ~
15934 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15938 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15939 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15943 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15944 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15947 \begin_layout Standard
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15960 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15961 works without problems.
15962 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15963 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15967 \begin_inset space ~
15975 \begin_inset space ~
15980 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15988 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15990 \begin_inset Index idx
15993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15994 FileFormats ! XHTML
16000 \begin_inset Index idx
16003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16012 \begin_layout Standard
16013 This file type has the extension
16014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16026 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16027 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16028 When \SpecialChar LyX
16029 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16030 suitable for the purpose.
16031 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16033 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16034 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16037 between different formats, which are described in section
16039 Math Output in XHTML
16044 \begin_inset space ~
16052 \begin_layout Standard
16053 XHTML output remains
16054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16061 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16062 features are supported yet.
16066 and the World Wide Web
16070 Additional Features
16072 manual, for more information.
16075 \begin_layout Standard
16076 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16078 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16079 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16085 \begin_layout Subsection
16087 \begin_inset Index idx
16090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16099 \begin_layout Standard
16100 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16101 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16110 or use the toolbar button
16117 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16118 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16119 \begin_inset space ~
16123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16125 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16129 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16131 \begin_inset space ~
16135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16137 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16142 Further output formats can be selected via
16144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16145 View (Other Formats)
16147 or the toolbar button
16156 \begin_layout Standard
16157 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16158 viewer window using the menu
16160 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16166 Update (Other Formats)
16171 \begin_layout Standard
16172 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16175 To have a real output, export your document.
16178 \begin_layout Section
16179 A few Words about Typography
16180 \begin_inset Index idx
16183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16192 \begin_layout Subsection
16193 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16194 \begin_inset Index idx
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16204 \begin_inset Index idx
16207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16216 \begin_layout Standard
16217 In \SpecialChar LyX
16219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16230 character comes in four lengths: the
16242 , and the minus sign:
16243 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16249 \begin_layout Standard
16250 \begin_inset Tabular
16251 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16252 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16253 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16254 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16255 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16256 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16285 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16325 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16350 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16352 \begin_inset space ~
16355 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16362 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16389 \begin_inset space ~
16392 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16413 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16447 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16453 \begin_layout Standard
16454 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16466 character multiple times in a row.
16467 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16468 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16501 \begin_layout Standard
16502 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16503 math mode and has a length of its own.
16504 Here are some examples:
16507 \begin_layout Enumerate
16508 line- and page-breaks
16509 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16519 \begin_layout Enumerate
16521 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16531 \begin_layout Enumerate
16532 Oh — there's a dash.
16533 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16543 \begin_layout Enumerate
16544 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16548 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16558 \begin_layout Subsection
16560 \begin_inset Index idx
16563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16572 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16579 \begin_layout Standard
16580 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16581 but automatically in the output.
16582 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16588 \begin_inset Index idx
16591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16598 following the rules of the document language.
16601 \begin_layout Standard
16603 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16607 font and with unusual constructs, like
16608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16616 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16617 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16618 This is done with the menu
16620 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16621 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16623 \begin_inset space ~
16629 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16631 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16635 \begin_layout Standard
16636 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16637 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16648 would then see the hyphen
16649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16656 as a hyphenation possibility.
16657 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16658 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16659 as described in section
16661 Prevent Hyphenation
16666 \begin_inset space ~
16674 \begin_layout Subsection
16676 \begin_inset Index idx
16679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16689 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16692 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16699 \begin_layout Standard
16700 When \SpecialChar LyX
16701 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16702 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16704 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16710 appropriate amount of space.
16711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16714 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16716 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16717 gets after another word.
16720 \begin_layout Standard
16721 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16722 not work in all cases.
16724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16735 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16736 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16739 \begin_layout Standard
16740 Here are some examples of
16744 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16747 \begin_layout Itemize
16752 \begin_layout Itemize
16757 \begin_layout Standard
16758 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16761 \begin_layout Itemize
16763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16767 this is too much space!
16770 \begin_layout Itemize
16775 \begin_layout Standard
16776 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16779 \begin_layout Standard
16780 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16783 \begin_layout Enumerate
16787 \begin_inset space ~
16792 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16793 \begin_inset space ~
16797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16799 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16804 \begin_inset Index idx
16807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16808 Spaces ! inter-word
16816 \begin_layout Enumerate
16820 \begin_inset space ~
16825 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16826 \begin_inset space ~
16830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16832 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16837 \begin_inset Index idx
16840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16849 \begin_layout Enumerate
16853 \begin_inset space ~
16857 \begin_inset space ~
16861 \begin_inset space ~
16868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16870 \begin_inset space ~
16875 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16876 This function is also bound to
16879 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16885 \begin_layout Standard
16886 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16889 \begin_layout Itemize
16891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16895 \begin_inset space \space{}
16898 this is too much space!
16901 \begin_layout Itemize
16902 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16906 \begin_layout Standard
16907 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16908 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16910 will take care of this.
16913 \begin_layout Standard
16914 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16918 \begin_inset space ~
16924 feature described in the section
16926 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16931 Additional Features
16936 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16938 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16940 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16944 \begin_inset Index idx
16947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16949 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16951 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16960 \begin_inset Index idx
16963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16965 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16967 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17000 \begin_layout Standard
17003 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
17005 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17009 Specifically, it will
17010 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17012 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17016 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17018 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17021 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17022 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17024 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17037 The keyboard character,
17041 , generates this automatically.
17044 \begin_layout Standard
17045 You can specify what character the
17050 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17054 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17067 \begin_inset Index idx
17070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17071 Document ! Settings
17077 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17079 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17085 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17088 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17089 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17093 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17095 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17101 \begin_layout Labeling
17102 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17105 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17116 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17126 \begin_inset space ~
17130 \begin_inset space ~
17134 \begin_inset Quotes els
17138 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17146 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17148 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17158 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17162 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17170 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17172 \begin_inset Quotes els
17176 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17179 quotation marks (as common, e.
17180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17188 \begin_layout Labeling
17189 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17191 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17194 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17198 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17202 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17204 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17208 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17212 \begin_inset space ~
17216 \begin_inset space ~
17220 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17224 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17232 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17233 Use quotes like ”this”
17234 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17236 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17240 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17244 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17248 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17251 quotation marks (as common, e.
17252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17260 \begin_layout Labeling
17261 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17263 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17266 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17270 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17274 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17276 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17280 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17284 \begin_inset space ~
17288 \begin_inset space ~
17292 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17296 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17304 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17306 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17310 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17314 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17316 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17320 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17324 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17328 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17331 quotation marks (as common, e.
17332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17340 \begin_layout Labeling
17341 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17343 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17346 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17350 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17354 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17356 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17360 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17364 \begin_inset space ~
17368 \begin_inset space ~
17372 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17376 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17384 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17386 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17390 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17394 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17396 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17400 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17404 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17408 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17411 quotation marks (as common, e.
17412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17420 \begin_layout Labeling
17421 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17423 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17426 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17430 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17434 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17436 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17440 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17444 \begin_inset space ~
17448 \begin_inset space ~
17452 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17456 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17464 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17466 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17470 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17474 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17476 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17480 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17484 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17488 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17491 quotation marks (as common, e.
17492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17495 g., in Switzerland)
17500 \begin_layout Labeling
17501 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17503 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17506 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17510 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17514 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17516 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17520 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17524 \begin_inset space ~
17528 \begin_inset space ~
17532 \begin_inset Quotes als
17536 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17544 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17546 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17550 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17554 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17556 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17560 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17564 \begin_inset Quotes als
17568 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17571 quotation marks (as common, e.
17572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17578 \begin_layout Labeling
17579 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17581 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17584 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17588 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17592 \begin_inset space ~
17596 \begin_inset space ~
17600 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17604 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17610 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17614 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17618 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17622 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17625 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17628 \begin_layout Labeling
17629 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17631 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17634 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17638 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17642 \begin_inset space ~
17646 \begin_inset space ~
17650 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17654 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17660 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17664 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17668 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17672 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17675 quotation marks (as common, e.
17676 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17679 g., in Great Britain)
17682 \begin_layout Labeling
17683 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17685 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17688 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17692 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17696 \begin_inset space ~
17700 \begin_inset space ~
17704 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17708 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17714 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17718 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17722 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17726 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17729 quotation marks (as common, e.
17730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17736 \begin_layout Labeling
17737 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17739 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17742 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17746 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17750 \begin_inset space ~
17754 \begin_inset space ~
17758 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17762 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17768 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17772 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17776 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17780 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17783 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17789 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17790 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17791 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17792 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17793 the inner marks differ).
17803 \begin_layout Labeling
17804 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17806 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17809 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17813 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17817 \begin_inset space ~
17821 \begin_inset space ~
17825 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17829 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17835 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17839 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17843 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17847 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17850 quotation marks (as common, e.
17851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17857 \begin_layout Labeling
17858 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17860 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17863 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17867 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17871 \begin_inset space ~
17875 \begin_inset space ~
17879 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17883 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17889 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17893 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17897 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17901 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17904 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17907 \begin_layout Labeling
17908 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17910 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17911 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17919 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17925 \begin_inset space ~
17929 \begin_inset space ~
17935 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17943 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17947 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17951 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17955 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17959 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17962 quotation marks (as common, e.
17963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17972 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17973 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17974 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17984 \begin_layout Labeling
17985 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17987 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
17988 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17996 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18002 \begin_inset space ~
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18012 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18020 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18024 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18028 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18032 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18036 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18039 quotation marks (as common, e.
18040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18043 g., in North Korea and China)
18047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18049 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18050 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18051 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18061 \begin_layout Standard
18063 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18065 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18069 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18071 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18078 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18079 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18080 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18081 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18089 does not necessarily mean
18090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18098 This is why we call them
18099 \begin_inset Quotes els
18103 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18124 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18125 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18127 \begin_inset Quotes els
18131 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18135 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18137 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18138 can be obtained by means of
18143 arg "quote-insert single"
18147 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18160 \begin_layout Standard
18162 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18163 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18164 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18165 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18166 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18167 If you check the setting
18169 Use dynamic quotation marks
18173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18177 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18178 they appear in a special color).
18179 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18180 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18185 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18188 \begin_layout Standard
18190 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18191 Individual quotation marks (i.
18192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18195 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18196 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18202 \begin_layout Subsection
18204 \begin_inset Index idx
18207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18208 Typography ! Ligatures
18214 \begin_inset Index idx
18217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18248 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18255 \begin_layout Standard
18256 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18257 print them as single characters.
18258 These groups are known as
18263 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18264 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18266 Here are the standard ligatures:
18269 \begin_layout Itemize
18273 \begin_layout Itemize
18277 \begin_layout Itemize
18281 \begin_layout Itemize
18285 \begin_layout Itemize
18289 \begin_layout Standard
18290 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18293 \begin_layout Standard
18294 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18295 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18303 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18319 To break a ligature, use
18321 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18322 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18324 \begin_inset space ~
18331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18342 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18359 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18367 \begin_layout Subsection
18369 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18371 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18373 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18377 \begin_inset Index idx
18380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18390 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18397 \begin_layout Standard
18400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18401 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18405 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18408 \begin_layout Description
18410 The name of the game.
18413 \begin_layout Description
18415 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18419 \begin_layout Description
18421 The \SpecialChar TeX
18422 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18426 \begin_layout Description
18427 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18428 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18432 \begin_layout Standard
18433 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18439 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18447 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18448 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18449 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18450 converges to the number
18451 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18454 : The actual version is
18455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18463 , the previous one was
18464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18475 \begin_layout Subsection
18477 \begin_inset Index idx
18480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18489 \begin_layout Standard
18490 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18491 space between two words.
18492 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18502 for units use the menu
18504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18505 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18507 \begin_inset space ~
18515 arg "space-insert thin"
18521 \begin_layout Standard
18522 Here is an example to show the differences:
18525 \begin_layout Standard
18526 \begin_inset Tabular
18527 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18528 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18529 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18530 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18537 \begin_inset space ~
18541 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18553 space between number and unit
18560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18565 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18569 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18581 half space between number and unit
18594 \begin_layout Subsection
18596 \begin_inset Index idx
18599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18600 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18608 \begin_layout Standard
18609 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18611 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18612 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18613 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18614 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18615 These bits of text became known as
18626 \begin_layout Standard
18627 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18628 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18629 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18630 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18631 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18632 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18633 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18634 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18635 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18636 \begin_inset Newline newline
18644 \begin_inset Newline newline
18652 \begin_inset Newline newline
18655 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18656 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18657 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18659 \begin_inset space ~
18663 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18665 key "latexcompanion"
18671 \begin_inset space ~
18675 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18682 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18683 's page break mechanism.
18686 \begin_layout Chapter
18687 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18690 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18697 \begin_layout Standard
18698 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18701 \begin_inset space ~
18707 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18710 \begin_layout Section
18712 \begin_inset Index idx
18715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18731 \begin_layout Standard
18733 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18736 \begin_layout Description
18739 \begin_inset space ~
18742 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18743 \begin_inset Newline newline
18747 \begin_inset Note Note
18750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18751 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18759 \begin_layout Description
18760 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18761 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18762 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18765 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18766 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18768 \begin_inset space ~
18774 \begin_inset Newline newline
18778 \begin_inset Note Comment
18781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18782 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18791 \begin_layout Description
18793 \begin_inset space ~
18796 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18797 set in the document settings under
18799 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18801 \begin_inset space ~
18807 \begin_inset Newline newline
18811 \begin_inset Newline newline
18815 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18824 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18825 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18830 of a comment that appears in the output.
18836 \begin_inset Newline newline
18840 \begin_inset Newline newline
18843 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18846 \begin_layout Standard
18847 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18859 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18862 \begin_layout Section
18864 \begin_inset Index idx
18867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18876 name "sec:Footnotes"
18883 \begin_layout Standard
18885 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18891 or the toolbar button
18894 arg "footnote-insert"
18906 \begin_inset Graphics
18907 filename clipart/footnote.png
18916 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18917 's representation of your footnote.
18927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18946 label, the box will
18950 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18951 Clicking on the box label again will close
18964 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18965 and click on the footnote
18980 \begin_layout Standard
18981 Here is an example footnote:
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18990 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18998 \begin_layout Standard
18999 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19000 position where the footnote box is placed.
19001 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19002 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19003 according to the document class.
19005 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19006 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19012 ey are described in the
19015 \begin_inset space ~
19023 \begin_layout Section
19025 \begin_inset Index idx
19028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19037 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19044 \begin_layout Standard
19045 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19047 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19049 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19051 \begin_inset space ~
19056 or the toolbar button
19059 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19085 appearing within your text.
19086 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19087 's representation of your margin
19096 \begin_layout Standard
19097 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19101 \begin_inset Marginal
19104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19106 This is a marginal note.
19114 \begin_layout Standard
19115 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19116 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19117 pages, right on odd pages.
19120 \begin_layout Standard
19121 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19124 \begin_inset space ~
19132 \begin_inset space ~
19140 \begin_layout Section
19141 Graphics and Images
19142 \begin_inset Index idx
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19152 \begin_inset Index idx
19155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19164 name "sec:Graphics"
19171 \begin_layout Standard
19172 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19173 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19176 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19185 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19188 \begin_layout Standard
19189 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19194 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19195 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19197 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19198 \begin_inset space ~
19202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19204 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19211 \begin_layout Standard
19216 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19217 of the image in the output.
19218 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19222 \begin_inset space ~
19226 \begin_inset space ~
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19239 \begin_inset space ~
19243 \begin_inset space ~
19248 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19249 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19261 \begin_inset space ~
19265 \begin_inset space ~
19270 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19271 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19273 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19278 \begin_inset space ~
19283 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19284 with the image size is printed.
19287 \begin_layout Standard
19288 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19289 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19291 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19294 \begin_layout Standard
19296 \begin_inset Graphics
19297 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19305 \begin_layout Standard
19306 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19307 the image into a float, see section
19308 \begin_inset space ~
19312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19314 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19321 \begin_layout Subsection
19323 \begin_inset Index idx
19326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19335 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19342 \begin_layout Standard
19343 You can insert images in any known file format.
19344 But as we explained in section
19345 \begin_inset space ~
19349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19351 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19355 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19357 therefore uses the program
19361 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19362 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19363 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19364 \begin_inset space ~
19368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19370 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19377 \begin_layout Standard
19378 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19381 \begin_layout Description
19383 \begin_inset space ~
19386 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19387 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19388 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19392 Graphics Interchange Format
19393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19396 (GIF, file extension
19397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19409 \begin_inset Index idx
19412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19444 Portable Network Graphics
19445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19448 (PNG, file extension
19449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19461 \begin_inset Index idx
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19496 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19500 (JPG, file extension
19501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19525 \begin_inset Index idx
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19559 \begin_layout Description
19561 \begin_inset space ~
19564 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19566 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19567 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19568 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19569 \begin_inset Newline newline
19572 Scalable image formats can be
19573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19576 Scalable Vector Graphics
19577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19580 (SVG, file extension
19581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19593 \begin_inset Index idx
19596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19628 Encapsulated PostScript
19629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19632 (EPS, file extension
19633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19645 \begin_inset Index idx
19648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19680 Portable Document Format
19681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19684 (PDF, file extension
19685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19697 \begin_inset Index idx
19700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19715 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19716 result will not be scalable.
19717 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19723 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19731 \begin_layout Standard
19732 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19739 \begin_layout Subsection
19740 Grouping of Image Settings
19741 \begin_inset Index idx
19744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19745 Images ! Settings grouping
19753 \begin_layout Standard
19754 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19756 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19757 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19759 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19760 need to manually change each of them.
19764 \begin_layout Standard
19765 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19768 \begin_inset space ~
19772 \begin_inset space ~
19784 \begin_inset space ~
19788 \begin_inset space ~
19794 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19795 and checking the name of the desired group.
19798 \begin_layout Section
19800 \begin_inset Index idx
19803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19819 \begin_layout Standard
19820 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19823 arg "tabular-insert"
19828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19832 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19833 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19834 from the rest of the table.
19835 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19836 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19838 Here is an example table:
19841 \begin_layout Standard
19843 \begin_inset Tabular
19844 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19845 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19846 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19847 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19848 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19849 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20049 \begin_layout Subsection
20053 \begin_layout Standard
20054 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20057 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20061 This brings up the table dialog.
20062 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20063 cursor is placed currently.
20064 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20065 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20066 done on all of your selection.
20069 \begin_layout Standard
20070 In addition to the table dialog, the
20073 \begin_inset space ~
20078 helps you in setting table properties.
20079 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20082 \begin_layout Standard
20086 \begin_inset space ~
20091 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20092 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20093 current cell respectively.
20094 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20096 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20097 of text, see section
20098 \begin_inset space ~
20102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20104 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20111 \begin_layout Standard
20112 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20113 using the check box
20122 This will merge the cells to
20126 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20127 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20128 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20129 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20130 in the last row without the upper border:
20133 \begin_layout Standard
20135 \begin_inset Tabular
20136 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20137 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20138 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20139 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20140 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20141 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 \begin_layout Standard
20273 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20274 -arguments for the table.
20275 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20276 explained in the chapter
20283 \begin_inset space ~
20289 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20290 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20291 but are visible in the output.
20294 \begin_layout Standard
20295 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 Most DVI-viewers are
20307 able to display rotations.
20315 \begin_layout Standard
20320 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20325 adds lines for all cell borders.
20328 \begin_layout Subsection
20330 \begin_inset Index idx
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 Tables ! Multi-page
20340 \begin_inset Index idx
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20352 \begin_layout Standard
20353 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20356 \begin_inset space ~
20360 \begin_inset space ~
20368 \begin_inset space ~
20373 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20374 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20377 \begin_layout Description
20382 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20383 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20384 Except for the first page, if
20387 \begin_inset space ~
20395 \begin_layout Description
20399 \begin_inset space ~
20404 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20405 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20408 \begin_layout Description
20413 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20414 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20415 except for the last page, if
20418 \begin_inset space ~
20426 \begin_layout Description
20430 \begin_inset space ~
20435 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20436 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20439 \begin_layout Description
20440 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20441 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20443 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20447 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20450 \begin_inset space ~
20458 \begin_layout Standard
20459 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20460 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20461 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20467 In this context, first means first in this order:
20470 \begin_inset space ~
20482 \begin_inset space ~
20487 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20490 \begin_layout Standard
20492 \begin_inset Tabular
20493 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20494 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20495 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20496 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20497 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20498 <row endfirsthead="true">
20499 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20505 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20510 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20529 <row endfirsthead="true">
20530 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20541 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <row endhead="true">
20563 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 <row endhead="true">
20594 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <row endfoot="true">
20627 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20638 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21619 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21637 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21710 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21772 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21803 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21865 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21927 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21958 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21989 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22020 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22051 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22082 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22113 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22144 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22175 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22268 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22299 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22330 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22361 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22423 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22454 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22485 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22516 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22547 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22578 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 <row endlastfoot="true">
22609 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22620 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 \begin_layout Subsection
22648 \begin_inset Index idx
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22660 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22667 \begin_layout Standard
22668 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22669 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22670 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22671 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22675 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22678 \begin_layout Standard
22679 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22680 for the column in the table dialog.
22681 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22682 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22686 \begin_layout Standard
22688 \begin_inset Tabular
22689 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22690 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22691 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22692 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22693 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22713 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22782 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 This is longer now.
22843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22894 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22895 This is longer now.
22900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22926 \begin_layout Standard
22927 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22928 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22934 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22940 Selection with the mouse or with
22944 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22945 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22946 the selection from outside the table.
22949 \begin_layout Section
22951 \begin_inset Index idx
22954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22970 \begin_layout Subsection
22974 \begin_layout Standard
22975 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22976 have a fixed location.
22978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22985 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22993 \begin_inset space ~
22998 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22999 too many notes on the current page.
23002 \begin_layout Standard
23003 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23004 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23005 and pages without text.
23006 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23007 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23008 Floats are therefore numbered.
23009 Referencing is described in section
23010 \begin_inset space ~
23014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23016 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23023 \begin_layout Standard
23024 To insert a float, use the menu
23026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23030 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23031 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23033 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23034 \begin_inset Index idx
23037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23043 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23044 paragraph within the float.
23045 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23046 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23047 left-clicking on the box label.
23048 A closed float box looks like this:
23049 \begin_inset Graphics
23050 filename clipart/float.png
23055 – a gray button with a red label.
23058 \begin_layout Standard
23059 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23061 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23064 \begin_layout Subsection
23066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23068 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23073 \begin_inset Index idx
23076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 Floats ! Figure floats
23085 \begin_layout Standard
23087 \begin_inset space ~
23091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23093 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23097 was created using the menu
23099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23100 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23106 arg "float-insert figure"
23110 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23119 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23123 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23124 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23126 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23128 \begin_inset space ~
23136 arg "layout-paragraph"
23142 \begin_layout Standard
23143 \begin_inset Float figure
23148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23150 \begin_inset Graphics
23151 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23161 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23166 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23170 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23183 \begin_layout Standard
23184 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23185 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23196 ) and refer to it using the menu
23198 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23204 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23208 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23209 vague references like
23210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23217 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23218 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23228 For more about cross-references, see section
23229 \begin_inset space ~
23233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23235 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23242 \begin_layout Standard
23243 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23244 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23245 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23246 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23247 as described in section
23248 \begin_inset space ~
23252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23254 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23260 \begin_inset space ~
23264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23266 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23270 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23271 You can also set the images one below the other.
23273 \begin_inset space ~
23277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23279 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23286 reference "fig:Platypus"
23290 are the subfigures.
23293 \begin_layout Standard
23294 \begin_inset Float figure
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23300 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23304 \begin_inset Float figure
23309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23310 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23315 name "fig:Undefinable"
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 \begin_inset Graphics
23329 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23340 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23344 \begin_inset Float figure
23349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23355 name "fig:Platypus"
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23368 \begin_inset Graphics
23369 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23381 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23388 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23393 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23397 Two distorted images.
23410 \begin_layout Subsection
23412 \begin_inset Index idx
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 Floats ! Table floats
23424 \begin_layout Standard
23425 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23428 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23431 or the toolbar button
23434 arg "float-insert table"
23438 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23439 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23440 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23442 \begin_inset space ~
23446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23448 reference "tab:Table-float"
23455 \begin_layout Standard
23456 \begin_inset Float table
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23462 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23467 name "tab:Table-float"
23479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23481 \begin_inset Tabular
23482 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23483 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23484 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23485 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23486 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23634 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23637 \end{array}\right]$
23645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23658 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23679 \begin_layout Subsection
23681 \begin_inset Index idx
23684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23693 \begin_layout Standard
23695 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23696 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23697 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23699 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23707 \begin_inset space ~
23715 \begin_layout Section
23717 \begin_inset Index idx
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 \begin_layout Standard
23731 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23733 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23734 \begin_inset space \space{}
23741 \begin_layout Standard
23742 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23743 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23749 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23750 and its alignment within the page.
23753 \begin_layout Standard
23755 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23765 height_special "totalheight"
23770 backgroundcolor "none"
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23776 This is a minipage.
23777 The text is set in an italic style.
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23784 another formatting.
23792 \begin_layout Standard
23793 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23796 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23800 as described in section
23801 \begin_inset space ~
23805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23807 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23812 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23818 \begin_layout Standard
23819 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23829 height_special "totalheight"
23834 backgroundcolor "none"
23837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23838 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23839 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23845 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23849 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23859 height_special "totalheight"
23864 backgroundcolor "none"
23867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23869 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23877 \begin_layout Standard
23878 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23884 \begin_layout Standard
23885 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23887 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23894 \begin_inset space ~
23902 \begin_layout Chapter
23903 Mathematical Formulas
23904 \begin_inset Index idx
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 \begin_inset Index idx
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23948 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23955 \begin_layout Standard
23956 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23961 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23964 \begin_layout Section
23966 \begin_inset Index idx
23969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 \begin_layout Standard
23979 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23992 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23994 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23995 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23996 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23998 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24004 \begin_layout Standard
24005 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24009 \begin_inset space ~
24014 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24017 \begin_layout Standard
24018 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24019 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24022 \begin_layout Standard
24023 This is a line with an inline formula
24024 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24030 \begin_layout Standard
24031 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24032 paragraph, like this one:
24033 \begin_inset Formula
24040 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24043 \begin_layout Standard
24045 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24047 For example, typing
24048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24061 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24062 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24066 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24069 \begin_inset space ~
24077 \begin_layout Subsection
24078 Navigating in Formulas
24079 \begin_inset Index idx
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24091 \begin_layout Standard
24092 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24093 achieved with the arrow keys.
24095 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24096 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24101 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24102 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24106 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24110 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24113 \end{array}\right]$
24121 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24126 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24127 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24130 \begin_layout Standard
24135 , printed in this document as
24136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24140 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24147 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24148 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24149 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24154 For example, if you want
24155 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24163 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24173 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24177 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24182 , since in the latter case only the
24185 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24190 will be under the square root sign:
24191 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24197 \begin_layout Standard
24198 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24200 \begin_inset Formula
24202 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24211 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24212 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24215 \begin_layout Subsection
24219 \begin_layout Standard
24220 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24221 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24225 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24226 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24227 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24228 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24229 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24233 \begin_layout Subsection
24234 Exponents and Subscripts
24235 \begin_inset Index idx
24238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24245 \begin_inset Index idx
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 \begin_layout Standard
24258 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24261 arg "math-superscript"
24267 arg "math-subscript"
24270 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24272 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24275 , type in a formula
24278 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24288 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24294 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24298 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24304 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24310 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24319 , you have to use an extra
24323 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24324 For example, if you want
24325 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24331 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24337 Subscripts are similar: To get
24338 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24344 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24352 \begin_layout Subsection
24354 \begin_inset Index idx
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 \begin_layout Standard
24367 Create a fraction either with the command
24373 or by using the icon
24376 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24382 \begin_inset space ~
24388 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24389 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24390 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24395 To move back up, press
24400 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24401 \begin_inset Formula
24403 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24406 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24414 \begin_layout Subsection
24416 \begin_inset Index idx
24419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 \begin_layout Standard
24429 Roots can be created using the
24432 \begin_inset space ~
24440 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24446 arg "math-insert \\root"
24468 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24474 always produces a square root.
24477 \begin_layout Subsection
24478 Operators with Limits
24479 \begin_inset Index idx
24482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24489 \begin_inset Index idx
24492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24501 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24508 \begin_layout Standard
24510 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24514 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24517 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24518 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24519 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24520 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24521 The sum operator will automatically place its
24522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24529 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24531 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24535 \begin_inset Formula
24537 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24542 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24546 \begin_layout Standard
24547 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24549 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24550 behind the operator and using the menu
24552 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24553 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24555 \begin_inset space ~
24559 \begin_inset space ~
24573 \begin_layout Standard
24574 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24583 \begin_inset Index idx
24586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24593 \begin_inset Formula
24595 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24600 which will place the
24601 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24613 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24614 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24620 \begin_layout Standard
24621 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24628 Have a look at section
24629 \begin_inset space ~
24633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24635 reference "subsec:Functions"
24639 for an explanation of function macros.
24642 \begin_layout Subsection
24644 \begin_inset Index idx
24647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24656 \begin_layout Standard
24657 Most math symbols can be found in the
24660 \begin_inset space ~
24665 under one of several categories; including
24682 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24686 \begin_layout Standard
24687 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24688 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24689 don't have to use the
24692 \begin_inset space ~
24697 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24699 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24702 \begin_layout Subsection
24704 \begin_inset Index idx
24707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24716 \begin_layout Standard
24717 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24723 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24729 \begin_inset space ~
24737 arg "math-insert \\space"
24741 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24742 For example, the sequence
24747 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24750 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24752 \begin_inset Graphics
24753 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24758 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24759 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24760 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24761 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24762 , because they are negative
24764 Here are two examples:
24767 \begin_layout Standard
24777 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24783 \begin_layout Standard
24793 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24799 \begin_layout Subsection
24801 \begin_inset Index idx
24804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24813 name "subsec:Functions"
24820 \begin_layout Standard
24824 \begin_inset space ~
24829 contains under the button
24832 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24835 a number of function macros, such as
24836 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24840 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24848 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24855 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24856 avoid confusions, because
24857 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24861 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24867 \begin_layout Standard
24868 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24870 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24874 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24880 \begin_layout Standard
24881 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24882 are placed, as described in section
24883 \begin_inset space ~
24887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24889 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24896 \begin_layout Subsection
24898 \begin_inset Index idx
24901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24910 \begin_layout Standard
24911 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24913 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24914 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24915 commands, for example, to enter
24916 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24919 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24920 Our example is entered by typing
24925 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24932 \begin_inset space ~
24936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24938 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24942 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24945 \begin_layout Standard
24946 \begin_inset Float table
24951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24952 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24957 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24961 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24971 \begin_inset Tabular
24972 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24973 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24974 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24975 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24976 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25114 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25222 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25276 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25384 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25438 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25492 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25537 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25558 \begin_layout Standard
25559 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25562 \begin_inset space ~
25570 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25573 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25577 \begin_layout Section
25578 Brackets and Delimiters
25579 \begin_inset Index idx
25582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25589 \begin_inset Index idx
25592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25601 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25608 \begin_layout Standard
25609 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25611 For some purposes, using just the keys
25616 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25617 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25618 toolbar delimiter icon
25621 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25625 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25626 \begin_inset Formula
25628 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25636 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25637 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25641 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25644 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25650 \begin_inset Formula
25652 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25660 \begin_layout Standard
25661 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25662 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25666 \begin_layout Standard
25667 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25668 left side and right side.
25669 If you use the option
25672 \begin_inset space ~
25677 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25678 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25680 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25685 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25686 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25689 \begin_layout Standard
25690 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25691 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25692 is to go inside the brackets.
25693 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25698 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25699 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25700 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25704 arg "math-delim ( )"
25710 \begin_layout Section
25711 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25712 \begin_inset Index idx
25715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25722 \begin_inset Index idx
25725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25732 \begin_inset Index idx
25735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25736 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25744 \begin_layout Standard
25745 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25749 \begin_inset space ~
25757 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25761 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25762 Here is an example:
25763 \begin_inset Formula
25765 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25774 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25775 \begin_inset space ~
25779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25781 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25786 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25787 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25788 This alignment is set in the box
25793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25842 for every column as default.
25843 For example, the sequence
25844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25855 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25856 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25857 corresponds to the relevant column.
25858 The result will look like this:
25859 \begin_inset Formula
25862 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25863 column & has & has\,right\\
25864 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25873 \begin_layout Standard
25874 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25877 arg "newline-insert newline"
25880 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25881 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25883 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25886 or the math toolbar.
25889 \begin_layout Standard
25890 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25891 It can be created with the menu
25893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25894 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25896 \begin_inset space ~
25908 Here is an example:
25909 \begin_inset Formula
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25927 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25930 arg "newline-insert newline"
25934 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25939 arg "newline-insert newline"
25942 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25950 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25951 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25952 A new row is created by every further entry of
25955 arg "newline-insert newline"
25959 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25960 Here is an example:
25961 \begin_inset Formula
25963 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25964 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25969 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25970 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25971 \begin_inset Formula
25973 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25981 \begin_layout Standard
25982 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25989 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25990 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25993 reference "eq:asquared"
25998 The other types are described in section
25999 \begin_inset space ~
26003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26005 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26012 \begin_layout Section
26013 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26014 \begin_inset Index idx
26017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26018 Math ! Formula numbering
26024 \begin_inset Index idx
26027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26028 Math ! Referencing formulas
26034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26036 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26043 \begin_layout Standard
26044 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26046 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26047 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26049 \begin_inset space ~
26053 \begin_inset space ~
26061 arg "math-number-toggle"
26065 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26066 within parentheses.
26067 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26068 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26069 the document class.
26070 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26071 separated by a dot:
26072 \begin_inset Formula
26082 arg "math-number-toggle"
26085 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26086 You can only number displayed formulas.
26089 \begin_layout Standard
26090 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26092 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26093 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26095 \begin_inset space ~
26099 \begin_inset space ~
26107 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26110 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26111 \begin_inset Formula
26114 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26120 To number all lines use the shortcut
26123 arg "math-number-toggle"
26129 \begin_layout Standard
26130 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26133 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26134 A label is inserted with the menu
26136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26145 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26146 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26147 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26159 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26160 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26161 We inserted in the following example the label
26162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26169 in the second line:
26170 \begin_inset Formula
26172 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26173 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26178 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26179 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26180 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26184 \begin_inset space ~
26192 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26196 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26197 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26198 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26199 as the formula number:
26202 \begin_layout Standard
26203 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26206 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26213 \begin_layout Standard
26214 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26215 's cross-reference box are described in section
26216 \begin_inset space ~
26220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26222 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26227 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26235 \begin_layout Section
26236 User defined math macros
26237 \begin_inset Index idx
26240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26249 \begin_layout Standard
26251 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26252 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26253 Math macros are explained in section
26256 \begin_inset space ~
26268 \begin_layout Section
26272 \begin_layout Subsection
26274 \begin_inset Index idx
26277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26286 \begin_layout Standard
26287 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26288 To set a font in a formula, use the
26291 \begin_inset space ~
26299 arg "math-insert \\font"
26302 , or enter its command, listed in table
26303 \begin_inset space ~
26307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26309 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26316 \begin_layout Standard
26317 \begin_inset Float table
26322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26323 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26328 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26332 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26342 \begin_inset Tabular
26343 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26344 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26345 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26346 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26378 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26405 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26432 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26465 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26492 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26519 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26553 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26580 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26614 \begin_layout Standard
26615 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26639 \begin_layout Standard
26640 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26641 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26646 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26647 space when you need a space in the box.
26648 Here is an example where
26649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26660 denotes the set of numbers:
26661 \begin_inset Formula
26663 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26671 \begin_layout Standard
26672 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26673 You can, for example, put a character in
26682 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26686 \begin_inset Newline newline
26689 So it is better not to use this feature.
26692 \begin_layout Standard
26693 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26694 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26698 \begin_inset Newline newline
26701 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26707 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26708 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26714 \begin_layout Standard
26721 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26724 \begin_layout Standard
26725 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26727 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26728 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26730 \begin_inset space ~
26738 \begin_layout Subsection
26740 \begin_inset Index idx
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26752 \begin_layout Standard
26753 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26755 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26759 \begin_inset space ~
26763 \begin_inset space ~
26771 \begin_inset space ~
26779 arg "math-insert \\font"
26783 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26784 in black instead of blue.
26785 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26786 Here is an example:
26787 \begin_inset Formula
26790 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26791 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26800 \begin_layout Subsection
26802 \begin_inset Index idx
26805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26814 \begin_layout Standard
26815 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26816 automatically chosen in most situations.
26834 For most characters,
26842 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26843 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26848 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26849 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26850 thinks are appropriate.
26851 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26854 arg "math-insert \\style"
26858 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26859 For example, you can set
26860 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26863 , which is normally in
26872 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26876 The four styles are used in the following example:
26879 \begin_layout Standard
26880 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26884 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26888 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26892 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26898 \begin_layout Standard
26899 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26900 is set in a particular size with the menu
26902 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26904 \begin_inset space ~
26909 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26910 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26911 will be adjusted to correspond.
26912 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26923 \begin_layout Standard
26927 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26933 \begin_layout Section
26934 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26936 \begin_inset Index idx
26939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26946 \begin_inset Index idx
26949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26958 \begin_layout Standard
26960 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26961 that are in common use.
26964 \begin_layout Subsection
26965 Enabling AMS-Support
26968 \begin_layout Standard
26969 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26970 the document by selecting the checkbox
26973 \begin_inset space ~
26977 \begin_inset space ~
26981 \begin_inset space ~
26988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26992 \begin_inset Index idx
26995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26996 Document ! Settings
27004 \begin_inset space ~
27010 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27011 -errors in formulas,
27012 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27015 \begin_layout Subsection
27017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27019 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27024 \begin_inset Index idx
27027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27028 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27036 \begin_layout Standard
27037 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27038 provides a selection of different formula types.
27040 allows you to choose between
27061 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27062 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27069 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27072 \begin_layout Chapter
27076 \begin_layout Section
27078 \begin_inset Index idx
27081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27090 name "sec:Cross-References"
27097 \begin_layout Standard
27098 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27099 's strengths is cross-references.
27100 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27102 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27103 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27104 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27107 \begin_layout Enumerate
27111 \begin_layout Enumerate
27112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27114 name "enu:Second-item"
27121 \begin_layout Enumerate
27125 \begin_layout Standard
27126 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27131 or by pressing the toolbar button
27138 A gray label box like this:
27139 \begin_inset Graphics
27140 filename clipart/label.png
27144 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27146 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27181 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27182 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27198 \begin_layout Standard
27199 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27204 or the toolbar button
27207 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27211 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27212 \begin_inset Graphics
27213 filename clipart/reference.png
27217 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27219 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27232 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27236 \begin_layout Standard
27237 As an alternative to
27239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27242 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27247 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27248 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27250 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27262 \begin_layout Standard
27263 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27264 \begin_inset space ~
27268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27270 reference "enu:Second-item"
27277 \begin_layout Standard
27278 It is recommended to use a protected space
27282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27283 described in section
27284 \begin_inset space ~
27288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27290 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27299 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27300 line breaks between them.
27303 \begin_layout Standard
27304 There are six formats of cross-references:
27307 \begin_layout Description
27308 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27311 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27318 \begin_layout Description
27319 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27320 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27332 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27339 \begin_layout Description
27340 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27341 \begin_inset space ~
27345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27346 LatexCommand pageref
27347 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27354 \begin_layout Description
27356 \begin_inset space ~
27360 \begin_inset space ~
27363 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27365 LatexCommand vpageref
27366 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27371 \begin_inset Newline newline
27374 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27375 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27376 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27377 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27378 it prints “on the next page”.
27379 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27382 \begin_layout Description
27384 \begin_inset space ~
27388 \begin_inset space ~
27392 \begin_inset space ~
27395 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27398 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27403 \begin_inset Newline newline
27406 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27412 ; otherwise it behaves like
27416 \begin_inset space ~
27420 \begin_inset space ~
27429 \begin_layout Description
27431 \begin_inset space ~
27434 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27435 \begin_inset Newline newline
27439 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27457 \begin_inset Index idx
27460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27462 -packages ! prettyref
27468 \begin_inset Index idx
27471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27473 -packages ! refstyle
27484 \begin_inset Newline newline
27487 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27488 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27491 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27495 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27496 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27504 is the default and preferred because
27508 supports only English documents.
27509 The format is specified by using the command
27521 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27522 preamble of the document.
27523 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27537 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414614
27545 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414616
27549 \begin_inset Newline newline
27556 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27559 \change_inserted 424524441 1484857490
27563 \begin_inset Newline newline
27566 Please note that neither
27574 (nor \SpecialChar LyX
27575 itself) predefines reference formats for all available types.
27576 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27578 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27579 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27584 , you might do so as follows:
27585 \begin_inset Newline newline
27592 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27599 \begin_inset Newline newline
27602 For more information about
27603 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843645
27604 defining formatted references
27605 \change_deleted 424524441 1484843647
27608 , have a look at the package documentation
27609 \change_deleted 424524441 1484843659
27613 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27615 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27621 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843594
27623 \begin_inset Newline newline
27626 The `Plural' and `Capitalized' options will be available with formatted
27627 references only if you are using the
27632 See its documentation, again, for more information.
27635 \begin_layout Description
27637 \begin_inset space ~
27640 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27642 LatexCommand nameref
27643 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27648 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414460
27652 \begin_layout Description
27654 \change_inserted 424524441 1483817846
27656 \begin_inset space ~
27659 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27660 label for the reference.
27661 This allows for customization, using ERT, if you want to issue a command
27662 that LyX does not support.
27667 , then you may want to use the
27668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27675 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27685 This is the form needed for, e.g.,
27690 \change_deleted 424524441 1483414539
27694 \begin_layout Standard
27695 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27696 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27698 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27702 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27706 \begin_layout Standard
27707 You can only use the style
27711 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27715 is always possible.
27718 \begin_layout Standard
27719 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27720 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27722 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27723 \begin_inset space ~
27727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27729 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27736 \begin_layout Standard
27737 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27741 \begin_inset space ~
27745 \begin_inset space ~
27750 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27751 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27754 \begin_inset space ~
27759 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27760 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27763 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27769 \begin_layout Standard
27770 You can change labels at any time.
27771 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27772 do not need to think about this.
27775 \begin_layout Standard
27776 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27778 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27782 \begin_layout Standard
27783 References are described in detail in the section
27784 \begin_inset space ~
27794 \begin_inset space ~
27800 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27804 \begin_layout Standard
27806 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27812 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27817 It is recommended to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27823 \begin_inset Index idx
27826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27828 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27830 -packages ! refstyle
27840 \begin_inset Index idx
27843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27845 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27847 -packages ! prettyref
27852 does not know all of \SpecialChar LyX
27853 's possible label shortcuts
27857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27859 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27867 is for example \SpecialChar LyX
27868 's shortcut for labels in figure captions.
27873 and is not internationalized.
27883 \begin_layout Section
27884 Table of Contents and other Listings
27885 \begin_inset Index idx
27888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27895 \begin_inset Index idx
27898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27899 Navigating ! Outline
27905 \begin_inset Index idx
27908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27924 \begin_layout Subsection
27926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27928 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27935 \begin_layout Standard
27936 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27938 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27939 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27941 \begin_inset space ~
27945 \begin_inset space ~
27951 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27953 If you click on it, the
27957 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27958 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27959 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27961 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27963 \begin_inset space ~
27968 that is described in section
27969 \begin_inset space ~
27973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27975 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27982 \begin_layout Standard
27983 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27984 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27986 \begin_inset space ~
27990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27992 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27996 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27998 \begin_inset space ~
28002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28004 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28008 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28010 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28013 \begin_layout Subsection
28014 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28017 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28024 \begin_layout Standard
28025 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28027 You can insert them via the
28029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28033 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28036 \begin_layout Section
28037 URLs and Hyperlinks
28038 \begin_inset Index idx
28041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28048 \begin_inset Index idx
28051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28060 \begin_layout Subsection
28062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28071 \begin_layout Standard
28072 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28074 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28080 \begin_layout Standard
28081 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28083 \begin_inset Flex URL
28086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28096 \begin_layout Standard
28097 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28103 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28107 \begin_layout Standard
28108 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28116 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28125 \begin_layout Subsection
28127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28129 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28136 \begin_layout Standard
28137 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28139 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28142 or with the toolbar button
28149 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28158 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28159 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28160 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28162 name "LyX's homepage"
28163 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28168 , an Email address like this:
28169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28171 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28178 , or a link to a file.
28181 \begin_layout Standard
28182 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28195 to the link target.
28198 \begin_layout Standard
28199 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28200 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28201 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28202 the text style dialog.
28203 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28207 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28209 name "LyX's homepage"
28210 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28218 \begin_layout Standard
28219 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28223 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28225 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28226 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28230 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28232 \begin_inset Newline newline
28240 \begin_inset Newline newline
28247 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28250 \begin_layout Section
28252 \begin_inset Index idx
28255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28264 name "sec:Appendices"
28271 \begin_layout Standard
28272 Appendices are created with the menu
28274 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28276 \begin_inset space ~
28280 \begin_inset space ~
28286 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28287 as the appendix part of the book.
28288 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28291 \begin_layout Standard
28292 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28293 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28294 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28295 and the subsection number.
28296 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28300 \begin_layout Standard
28302 \begin_inset space ~
28306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28308 reference "chap:Credits"
28313 \begin_inset space ~
28317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28319 reference "subsec:Export"
28326 \begin_layout Section
28328 \begin_inset Index idx
28331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28340 name "sec:Bibliography"
28347 \begin_layout Standard
28348 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28350 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880152
28352 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880151
28356 You can include a bibliography database,
28357 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880276
28362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28363 Known under the name
28364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28367 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28379 which is explained in
28380 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28381 the next subsection
28382 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890955
28384 \begin_inset space ~
28388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28390 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28399 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28405 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28407 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883190
28411 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883197
28415 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890942
28419 \begin_inset space ~
28423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28425 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28430 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883212
28434 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28436 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28438 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28441 author-year citations,
28442 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28443 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28446 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28448 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28449 should seriously consider
28456 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28458 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28461 a bibliography database.
28462 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28466 \begin_layout Standard
28468 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28469 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28470 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28474 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28475 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28476 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28477 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28478 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28483 \begin_layout Subsection
28485 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885645
28486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28488 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28494 The Bibliography Environment
28497 \begin_layout Standard
28502 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28504 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28513 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28516 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28517 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28518 of ASCII characters only.
28521 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28531 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28532 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28536 \begin_layout Standard
28537 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28542 or the toolbar button
28545 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28549 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28550 containing the available citations.
28551 Select one or more keys from the list and
28561 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28562 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28566 \begin_layout Standard
28567 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28568 entry with surrounding brackets.
28573 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28574 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28586 \begin_layout Standard
28590 Companion Second Edition
28593 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28595 key "latexcompanion"
28603 \begin_layout Standard
28604 The \SpecialChar LyX
28605 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28606 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28614 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28618 \begin_layout Standard
28620 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28621 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28626 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28638 Author A and Author B(Year)
28639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28646 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28648 Then, if you select
28654 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28658 \begin_inset Index idx
28661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28663 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28664 Document ! Settings
28671 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28677 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28684 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28689 \begin_layout Standard
28690 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28693 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28695 \begin_inset space ~
28703 arg "layout-paragraph"
28707 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28710 \begin_layout Subsection
28711 Bibliography databases
28712 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28713 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28717 \begin_inset Index idx
28720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28721 Bibliography ! Databases
28727 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28729 \begin_inset Index idx
28732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28733 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28744 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28751 \begin_layout Standard
28752 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28753 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28755 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28758 in different documents.
28762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28763 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28765 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28766 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28771 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28773 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28774 your working field in a database.
28775 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28776 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28777 list for that document.
28778 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28782 \begin_layout Standard
28783 The database is a text file with the file extension
28784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28795 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28796 The format is explained in
28797 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28804 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28806 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28808 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28814 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28815 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28816 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28818 \begin_inset Flex URL
28821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28823 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28829 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28833 \begin_layout Standard
28835 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28837 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28838 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28839 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28841 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28842 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28843 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28845 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28854 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28855 (although it has been significantly
28856 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28863 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28868 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28869 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28870 might conversely fail to correctly
28871 handle databases that use specific
28882 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28886 \begin_layout Standard
28888 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28889 Both approaches are described in turn.
28892 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28894 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28895 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28897 \begin_inset Index idx
28900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28902 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28903 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28916 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28918 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28922 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28923 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28933 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28935 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28939 \begin_inset space ~
28945 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28946 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28947 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28948 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28958 Add bibliography to TOC
28960 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28965 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28966 in the document or just the cited references.
28969 \begin_layout Standard
28971 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28972 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28975 style file is a text file with the file extension
28976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28987 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28988 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28989 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28990 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28992 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28998 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28999 \begin_inset Newline newline
29003 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29005 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29016 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
29017 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29022 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29028 \begin_layout Standard
29029 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29030 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
29034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29036 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
29038 \begin_inset Index idx
29041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29043 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
29044 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29052 \begin_layout Standard
29054 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
29055 Accessing a database via
29059 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29067 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29069 \begin_inset space ~
29075 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
29076 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29078 you cannot select a
29082 file (we will explain later, why).
29083 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29086 Add bibliography to TOC
29088 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29093 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29094 in the document or just the cited references.
29097 \begin_layout Standard
29099 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
29104 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
29106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29117 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
29119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29130 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29131 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
29132 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
29133 bibliography style.
29136 \begin_layout Standard
29138 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
29143 styles are not set in the
29146 \begin_inset space ~
29157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29158 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29162 However, in the former dialog (in the
29166 field which is only visible if you use
29170 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
29171 (for instance concerning its heading).
29172 These options are detailed in the
29177 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29189 \begin_layout Standard
29191 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
29192 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29193 \begin_inset space ~
29197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29199 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29209 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29211 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
29212 Bibliography Processors
29215 \begin_layout Standard
29216 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29218 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
29219 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
29220 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
29225 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
29227 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
29231 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
29237 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
29238 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
29242 \begin_layout Standard
29244 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
29245 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
29247 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29248 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
29249 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29254 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
29255 do this on a general level in
29257 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29258 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29259 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29262 , or for individual documents
29263 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
29264 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
29273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29274 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29276 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
29281 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29282 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29283 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29289 The following variants are
29290 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
29292 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
29293 available by default
29298 \begin_layout Description
29300 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
29301 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
29305 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29313 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
29314 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
29315 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
29316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29320 \begin_inset space \space{}
29327 ), only with the package
29330 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
29333 and many specific features
29340 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
29341 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
29343 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
29348 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29357 \begin_layout Description
29358 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29359 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29360 with all bibliography packages,
29361 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
29363 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
29367 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
29368 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
29369 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
29371 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
29377 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
29380 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
29385 \begin_layout Description
29386 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29387 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
29388 (but no Unicode support)
29390 , larger memory than
29394 , works with all bibliography packages
29395 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
29396 , although more complex
29400 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29404 features are supported.
29407 \begin_layout Standard
29409 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29418 bibliography processor set in
29420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29421 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29432 bibliography processor in
29434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29435 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29436 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29439 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29440 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29449 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29450 -based bibliography styles).
29451 This should suit most needs.
29456 \begin_layout Standard
29458 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29459 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29460 By default, this is
29468 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29469 You can adjust it in
29471 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29472 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29473 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29481 \begin_layout Standard
29483 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29484 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29486 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29487 Selected bibliography processors
29489 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29490 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29491 specification of the variants
29492 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29496 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29498 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29502 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29505 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29507 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29513 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29515 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29523 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29535 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29539 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29541 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29547 \begin_layout Standard
29549 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29551 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29554 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29555 When you select the option
29557 Sectioned bibliography
29561 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29562 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29565 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29569 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29571 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29575 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29579 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29582 are explained in detail in section
29584 Customizing Bibliographies
29588 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29593 Additional Features
29598 \begin_layout Standard
29600 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29601 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29602 the two methods of creating them.
29603 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29604 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29605 We used the style file
29609 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29614 \begin_layout Subsection
29616 \begin_inset Index idx
29619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29620 Bibliography ! Citation format
29626 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29630 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29639 \begin_layout Standard
29641 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29642 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29647 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29656 ) or author-year citations (as
29657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29666 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29670 \begin_layout Standard
29672 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29673 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29676 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29680 \begin_inset Index idx
29683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29685 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29686 Document ! Settings
29693 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29696 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29697 bibliography approach.
29700 \begin_layout Standard
29702 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29707 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29712 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29716 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29723 \begin_layout Standard
29725 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29726 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29734 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29742 Currently, the following options are available:
29745 \begin_layout Itemize
29747 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29754 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29758 \begin_layout Itemize
29760 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29769 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29771 Biblatex citation style
29775 Biblatex bibliography style
29778 Many different style variants are supported.
29783 package can be entered in the
29790 \begin_layout Itemize
29792 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29795 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29805 natbib compatibility mode
29806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29810 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29815 (see below) or want to emulate
29819 behavior very closely.
29824 , this option has some additional styles.
29825 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29830 styles are also supported by this variant.
29833 \begin_layout Itemize
29835 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29844 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29847 \begin_layout Itemize
29849 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29858 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29863 \begin_layout Standard
29865 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29874 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29876 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29881 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29883 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29884 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29901 , a suitable style is proposed).
29906 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29910 \begin_layout Standard
29912 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29913 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29915 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29917 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29920 n the citation reference dialog
29921 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29922 you can set a special citation format
29926 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29927 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29928 a name prefix such as
29929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29944 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29948 e., use or don't use
29949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29958 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29959 For this feature you need to enable the option
29965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29969 \begin_inset Index idx
29972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29973 Document ! Settings
29983 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29984 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29985 style files as explained in
29986 the previous section.
29991 \begin_layout Standard
29993 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29994 In the citation dialog,
29995 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29997 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
30000 ou can also set text to appear
30001 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
30004 after a citation reference,
30005 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
30006 in the citation reference window
30007 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
30009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30013 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30031 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
30033 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
30036 example where the text
30037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30041 \begin_inset space ~
30045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30048 appears after the reference:
30051 \begin_layout Quote
30053 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30056 key "latexcompanion"
30062 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
30066 \begin_layout Standard
30068 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998090
30069 All styles except for
30073 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
30074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30082 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30086 \begin_layout Standard
30088 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
30089 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30090 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
30091 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
30097 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
30098 in a multi-citation (so-called
30099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30102 qualified citation lists
30103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30109 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
30111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30118 window will display three columns:
30119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30143 If you double-click on an item's
30144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30159 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30164 General text before
30165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30176 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30181 \begin_layout Section
30183 \begin_inset Index idx
30186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30202 \begin_layout Standard
30203 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30207 \begin_inset space ~
30212 or the toolbar button
30219 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30220 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30221 by \SpecialChar LyX
30222 as the index entry.
30225 \begin_layout Standard
30226 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30229 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30231 \begin_inset space ~
30237 A light blue box labeled
30238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30249 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30250 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30254 \begin_layout Standard
30255 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30256 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30257 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30258 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30262 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30270 \begin_layout Subsection
30271 Grouping Index Entries
30272 \begin_inset Index idx
30275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30284 \begin_layout Standard
30285 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30287 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30288 lists under the entry
30289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30297 First we create the entry
30298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30306 \begin_inset space ~
30310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30312 reference "subsec:Lists"
30317 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30318 \begin_inset space ~
30322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30324 reference "sec:Itemize"
30328 , we insert the command
30331 \begin_layout Standard
30337 \begin_layout Standard
30341 \begin_layout Standard
30347 \begin_layout Standard
30348 for the enumerated list in section
30349 \begin_inset space ~
30353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30355 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30362 \begin_layout Standard
30363 The exclamation mark
30364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30371 marks the grouping levels.
30372 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30373 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30374 If we don't have an index entry for
30375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30382 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30385 \begin_layout Subsection
30387 \begin_inset Index idx
30390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30391 Index ! Page ranges
30399 \begin_layout Standard
30400 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30402 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30403 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30404 an index entry in section
30405 \begin_inset space ~
30409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30411 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30418 \begin_layout Standard
30421 Paragraph environments|(
30424 \begin_layout Standard
30425 and another entry at the end of section
30426 \begin_inset space ~
30430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30432 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30439 \begin_layout Standard
30442 Paragraph environments|)
30445 \begin_layout Standard
30447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30470 respectively start and end the index range.
30471 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30472 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30473 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30474 An example is the index entry
30475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30478 Document ! Settings
30479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30485 \begin_layout Subsection
30487 \begin_inset Index idx
30490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30491 Index ! Cross referencing
30499 \begin_layout Standard
30500 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30501 We referred for example in the index entry
30502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30510 \begin_inset space ~
30514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30516 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30520 ) to the index entry
30521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30528 in the same section using the entry
30531 \begin_layout Standard
30534 GIF|see{Image formats}
30537 \begin_layout Standard
30538 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30540 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30541 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30544 \begin_layout Subsection
30546 \begin_inset Index idx
30549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30550 Index ! Entry order
30558 \begin_layout Standard
30559 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30560 follow the rules for the index order.
30561 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30567 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30569 \begin_inset space ~
30573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30575 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30584 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30585 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30610 \begin_inset Index idx
30613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30614 Dummy entries ! maïs
30620 \begin_inset Index idx
30623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30624 Dummy entries ! maître
30630 \begin_inset Index idx
30633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30634 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30639 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30640 maïs, maison, maître.
30641 To achieve this, we use the command
30644 \begin_layout Standard
30647 previous entry@current entry
30650 \begin_layout Standard
30651 In our case we want to have
30652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30667 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30670 \begin_layout Standard
30676 \begin_layout Standard
30677 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30678 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30680 See the next subsection for an example.
30683 \begin_layout Standard
30684 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30690 \begin_layout Standard
30691 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30696 to generate the index (see section
30697 \begin_inset space ~
30701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30703 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30712 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30713 -package aeguill in section
30714 \begin_inset space ~
30718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30720 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30724 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30725 -packages although all these index
30726 commands start with
30727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30740 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30745 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30748 \begin_layout Standard
30760 \begin_layout Standard
30772 \begin_layout Subsection
30774 \begin_inset Index idx
30777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30778 Index ! Entry layout
30786 \begin_layout Standard
30787 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30788 \begin_inset Index idx
30791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30794 This is an italic dummy entry
30799 You can also format the page number using the character
30800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30807 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30808 -command without a backslash.
30809 We can write for example
30812 \begin_layout Standard
30815 italic page number:|textit
30818 \begin_layout Standard
30819 to get the page number in italic.
30820 \begin_inset Index idx
30823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30824 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30829 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30830 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30848 \begin_inset space ~
30854 Have a look at section
30855 \begin_inset space ~
30859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30861 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30865 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30869 \begin_layout Standard
30870 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30878 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30882 to generate the index, see section
30883 \begin_inset space ~
30887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30889 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30898 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30903 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30907 key "latexcompanion"
30920 \begin_layout Standard
30921 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30923 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30924 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30925 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30926 If so, put the following in the preamble
30929 \begin_layout Standard
30941 \begin_layout Standard
30945 \begin_layout Standard
30951 \begin_layout Standard
30952 in the index entry.
30953 \begin_inset Index idx
30956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30957 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30962 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30963 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30964 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30967 \begin_layout Standard
30968 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30969 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30970 a bold font for all index entries.
30971 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30983 documentation for details,
30984 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30986 key "makeindex,xindy"
30994 \begin_layout Subsection
30996 \begin_inset Index idx
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31008 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31015 \begin_layout Standard
31016 If the index generation program
31020 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31021 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31025 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31026 distribution, is used.
31030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31035 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31036 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31037 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31038 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31039 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31049 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31051 dialog, see section
31052 \begin_inset space ~
31056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31058 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31063 The available options are listed and explained in
31064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31066 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31072 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31076 \begin_layout Standard
31077 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31078 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31082 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31086 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31087 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31090 \begin_layout Subsection
31094 \begin_layout Standard
31095 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31096 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31104 next to the standard index.
31106 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31107 that add this feature.
31114 \begin_inset Index idx
31117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31119 -packages ! splitidx
31124 package to generate multiple indexes.
31125 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31131 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31141 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31142 style, but it also includes
31143 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31144 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31152 \begin_layout Standard
31153 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31154 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31157 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31160 and select the option
31162 Use multiple Indexes
31169 already contains the standard index
31170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31178 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31179 also appear as a heading) to the
31183 input field and press the
31188 The new index now also appears in the list.
31189 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31190 label color to the new index.
31193 \begin_layout Standard
31194 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31204 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31205 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31206 are additional features:
31209 \begin_layout Itemize
31210 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31211 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31214 \begin_layout Itemize
31215 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31216 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31224 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31225 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31226 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31227 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31230 \begin_layout Section
31231 Nomenclature/Glossary
31232 \begin_inset Index idx
31235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31242 \begin_inset Index idx
31245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31276 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31283 \begin_layout Standard
31284 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31285 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31286 called nomenclature or glossary.
31289 \begin_layout Standard
31290 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31297 \begin_inset Index idx
31300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31302 -packages ! nomencl
31308 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31310 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31317 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31321 \begin_layout Standard
31322 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31323 and then use the menu
31325 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31331 \begin_inset space ~
31336 or the toolbar button
31339 arg "nomencl-insert"
31344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31355 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31358 \begin_layout Standard
31359 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31360 The first is the term or
31364 that you wish to define.
31369 of the term or symbol.
31372 \begin_layout Standard
31373 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31381 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31382 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31390 \begin_layout Subsection
31391 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31392 \begin_inset Index idx
31395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31396 Nomenclature ! Layout
31404 \begin_layout Standard
31405 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31409 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31416 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31424 \begin_inset Newline newline
31432 \begin_inset Newline newline
31438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31445 character starts/ends the formula.
31446 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31447 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31459 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31469 \begin_layout Standard
31470 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31471 -syntax is given in section
31472 \begin_inset space ~
31476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31478 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31485 \begin_layout Standard
31489 \begin_inset space ~
31494 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31496 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31501 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31508 in this document is:
31509 \begin_inset Newline newline
31514 dummy entry for the character
31519 \begin_inset Newline newline
31531 \begin_inset space ~
31541 font use the command
31570 \begin_layout Standard
31571 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31576 \begin_inset space \space{}
31580 \begin_inset Newline newline
31596 \begin_inset Newline newline
31599 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31600 This command will make the font of all symbols
31607 \begin_inset space ~
31615 \begin_layout Standard
31616 If the characters |
31617 \begin_inset space \space{}
31621 \begin_inset space \space{}
31625 \begin_inset space \space{}
31629 \begin_inset space \space{}
31633 \begin_inset space \space{}
31636 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31637 a quote character in front of them.
31638 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31639 LatexCommand nomenclature
31640 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31641 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31649 \begin_layout Subsection
31650 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31651 \begin_inset Index idx
31654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31655 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31663 \begin_layout Standard
31664 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31665 -code of the symbol
31667 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31669 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31672 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31673 LatexCommand nomenclature
31675 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31683 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31687 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31688 LatexCommand nomenclature
31691 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31697 They will be sorted by
31698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31724 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31727 will be sorted before the
31731 since the character
31732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31739 is considered in sorting.
31742 \begin_layout Standard
31743 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31746 \begin_inset space ~
31751 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31752 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31754 For the example given, you can insert
31758 in this field for the
31759 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31766 will be located before
31767 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31773 \begin_layout Standard
31774 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31779 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31789 \begin_layout Subsection
31790 Nomenclature Options
31791 \begin_inset Index idx
31794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31795 Nomenclature ! Options
31803 \begin_layout Standard
31808 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31809 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31812 \begin_layout Description
31813 refeq Appends the phrase
31814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31829 to every nomenclature entry, where
31835 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31838 \begin_layout Description
31839 refpage Appends the phrase
31840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31855 to every nomenclature entry, where
31861 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31864 \begin_layout Description
31865 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31868 \begin_layout Standard
31869 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31870 class options list in the
31872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31876 In this document the options
31883 \begin_layout Standard
31884 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31890 \begin_layout Standard
31891 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31892 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31897 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31900 \begin_layout Description
31910 \begin_layout Description
31913 nomrefpage Like the
31920 \begin_layout Description
31923 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31932 \begin_layout Description
31936 \begin_inset space ~
31942 \begin_inset space ~
31947 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31950 \begin_layout Standard
31952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31959 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31960 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31964 \begin_layout Standard
31972 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31975 \begin_inset Newline newline
31982 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31987 \begin_inset Newline newline
31991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32006 by their translation.
32009 \begin_layout Subsection
32010 Printing the Nomenclature
32011 \begin_inset Index idx
32014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32015 Nomenclature ! Printing
32023 \begin_layout Standard
32024 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32027 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32043 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32044 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32045 You can choose between these settings:
32048 \begin_layout Description
32049 Default a space of 1
32050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32056 \begin_layout Description
32058 \begin_inset space ~
32062 \begin_inset space ~
32065 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
32068 \begin_layout Description
32069 Custom custom space
32072 \begin_layout Standard
32073 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32082 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32090 For example, in order to change the name to
32094 , add the following line to the preamble:
32097 \begin_layout Standard
32105 nomname}{List of Symbols}
32108 \begin_layout Subsection
32109 Nomenclature Program
32110 \begin_inset Index idx
32113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32114 Nomenclature ! Program
32120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32122 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32129 \begin_layout Standard
32135 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32136 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32138 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32143 by adding options, see section
32144 \begin_inset space ~
32148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32150 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32155 The available options are listed and explained in
32156 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32158 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32166 \begin_layout Section
32168 \begin_inset Index idx
32171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32178 \begin_inset Index idx
32181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32182 Document ! Branches
32188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32190 name "sec:Branches"
32197 \begin_layout Standard
32198 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32199 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32200 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32201 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32204 \begin_layout Standard
32205 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32206 allows you to put text into branches.
32207 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32208 To create a branch, either select the menu
32210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32211 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32214 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32216 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32223 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32224 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32225 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32226 and whether the name of the branch should
32227 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32228 (see below for an example).
32229 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32230 to the name of the other) and to add
32231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32243 \begin_inset space ~
32246 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32247 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32250 \begin_layout Standard
32251 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32252 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32257 where you can choose a branch.
32258 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32262 \begin_layout Standard
32263 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32264 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32267 \begin_layout Standard
32268 \begin_inset Branch Question
32272 \begin_layout Standard
32273 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32281 \begin_layout Standard
32282 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32286 \begin_layout Standard
32287 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32295 \begin_layout Standard
32302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32303 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32306 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32307 Consider for example a file
32308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32315 which has the above branches.
32317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32324 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32348 branch were inactive,
32349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32364 branch was active, likewise
32365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32380 branch was active, and
32381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32384 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32388 if both branches were active.
32389 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32390 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
32394 \begin_layout Standard
32396 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32397 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
32398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32405 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
32411 \begin_inset Branch Question
32415 \begin_layout Standard
32417 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
32418 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
32426 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32427 To control whether a particular inset is
32428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32435 , right-click on the inset button and choose
32436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32442 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32448 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
32452 \begin_layout Standard
32453 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32459 \begin_layout Standard
32460 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32461 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32462 definitions for each branch.
32463 For example you can define for the question branch
32467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32468 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32469 -syntax, see section
32470 \begin_inset space ~
32474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32476 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32488 \begin_layout Standard
32498 \begin_layout Standard
32508 \begin_layout Standard
32509 and for the answer branch
32512 \begin_layout Standard
32522 \begin_layout Standard
32532 \begin_layout Standard
32533 \begin_inset Branch Question
32537 \begin_layout Standard
32541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32569 \begin_layout Standard
32570 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32574 \begin_layout Standard
32578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32606 \begin_layout Standard
32607 Now it is possible to use the
32611 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32618 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32621 commands to obtain conditional output.
32622 Here is an example formula where only the
32629 \begin_inset Formula
32631 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32639 \begin_layout Standard
32640 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32648 \begin_layout Standard
32649 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32655 \begin_inset space \space{}
32658 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32660 For this advanced usage, see the
32666 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32671 \begin_layout Section
32673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32675 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32680 \begin_inset Index idx
32683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32692 \begin_layout Standard
32695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32696 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32699 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32701 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32707 \begin_inset Index idx
32710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32712 -packages ! hyperref
32717 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32718 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32719 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32720 part of the document.
32724 \begin_layout Standard
32725 The header information in the dialog tab
32729 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32730 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32731 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32732 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32736 \begin_inset space ~
32740 \begin_inset space ~
32745 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32746 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32747 and author entries.
32751 \begin_inset space ~
32755 \begin_inset space ~
32759 \begin_inset space ~
32764 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32767 \begin_layout Standard
32768 You can specify in the dialog tab
32772 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32777 \begin_inset space ~
32781 \begin_inset space ~
32785 \begin_inset space ~
32790 option allows long links to be split;
32793 \begin_inset space ~
32797 \begin_inset space ~
32801 \begin_inset space ~
32809 \begin_inset space ~
32814 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32817 \begin_inset space ~
32822 colors the different links.
32823 The default colors are:
32826 \begin_layout Labeling
32827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32832 for hyperlinks and URLs
32835 \begin_layout Labeling
32836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32844 \begin_layout Labeling
32845 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32853 \begin_layout Standard
32854 but you can change these in the field
32859 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32862 \begin_layout Standard
32865 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32868 \begin_layout Standard
32873 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32874 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32875 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32878 \begin_layout Standard
32883 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32884 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32885 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32895 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32896 when opening the PDF.
32898 \begin_inset space ~
32901 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32902 \begin_inset space ~
32905 1 will only display the sections.
32908 \begin_layout Standard
32909 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32910 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32916 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32917 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32927 \begin_layout Section
32929 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32933 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32940 \begin_layout Subsection
32943 \begin_inset Index idx
32946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32956 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32963 \begin_layout Standard
32964 As \SpecialChar LyX
32965 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32966 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32967 commands and constructs,
32970 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32971 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32972 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32973 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32974 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32975 cannot support all packages and
32979 \begin_layout Standard
32980 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32981 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32982 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32986 Code box is created by the menu
32988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32990 \begin_inset space ~
32995 or by the toolbar button
33008 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33016 \begin_layout Standard
33017 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33019 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33021 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
33025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33026 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
33031 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33038 , you can write the command part
33044 in a \SpecialChar TeX
33045 Code box before the word and the closing brace
33049 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
33050 Code box behind the word.
33051 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
33052 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
33056 \begin_layout Standard
33057 \begin_inset Graphics
33058 filename clipart/ERT.png
33066 \begin_layout Standard
33070 \begin_layout Standard
33071 This is a line with a
33075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33098 \begin_layout Standard
33099 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33107 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33108 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33109 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33110 know that the command is finished.
33118 \begin_layout Subsection
33119 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33121 \begin_inset Argument 1
33124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33125 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33132 \begin_inset Index idx
33135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33145 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33152 \begin_layout Standard
33153 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33154 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33155 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33156 uses in the background.
33157 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33158 is based on commands, you can
33159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33167 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33168 any time if you know the right commands.
33169 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33170 is the end of the day.
33171 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33172 all caption labels bold.
33173 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33175 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33179 \begin_layout Standard
33180 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33182 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33184 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33187 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33197 \begin_layout Standard
33198 As result you find that the package
33203 \begin_inset Index idx
33206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33208 -packages ! caption
33214 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33216 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33219 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33223 \begin_inset space ~
33231 \begin_layout Standard
33236 usepackage[options]{package name}
33239 \begin_layout Standard
33240 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33241 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33242 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33243 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33246 \begin_layout Standard
33247 In your case the package name is
33252 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33257 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33258 So you add the command
33261 \begin_layout Standard
33266 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33269 \begin_layout Standard
33270 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33275 For more commands provided by the
33279 package, have a look at its documentation,
33280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33295 \begin_layout Standard
33296 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33298 For example if you use a
33302 class, you don't need the package
33306 , you can instead write
33309 \begin_layout Standard
33314 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33319 \begin_layout Standard
33320 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33321 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33322 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33329 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33332 \begin_layout Standard
33333 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33334 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33336 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33337 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33338 Code box as described in the previous
33342 \begin_layout Standard
33343 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33344 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33347 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33349 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33357 \begin_layout Standard
33358 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33364 \begin_layout Standard
33368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33378 \begin_inset Note Note
33381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33382 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33390 \begin_layout Left Header
33391 \begin_inset Argument 1
33394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33414 \begin_inset Note Note
33417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33418 defines the header line as described below
33426 \begin_layout Center Header
33427 \begin_inset Argument 1
33430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 \begin_layout Right Header
33440 \begin_inset Argument 1
33443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33464 \begin_layout Left Footer
33465 \begin_inset Argument 1
33468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33489 \begin_layout Center Footer
33490 \begin_inset Argument 1
33493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 \begin_inset Newline newline
33509 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33515 \begin_layout Right Footer
33516 \begin_inset Argument 1
33519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33541 \begin_layout Section
33542 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33545 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33550 \begin_inset Index idx
33553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33554 Document ! Header/Footer line
33560 \begin_inset Index idx
33563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33572 \begin_layout Standard
33573 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33577 \begin_inset space ~
33588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33594 \begin_inset space ~
33600 As a second step add in the menu
33602 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33603 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33612 Custom Header/Footerlines
33615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33619 This module offers the following 6
33620 \begin_inset space ~
33626 \begin_layout Description
33628 \begin_inset space ~
33632 \begin_inset space ~
33636 \begin_inset space ~
33640 \begin_inset space ~
33644 \begin_inset space ~
33650 \begin_layout Description
33652 \begin_inset space ~
33656 \begin_inset space ~
33660 \begin_inset space ~
33664 \begin_inset space ~
33668 \begin_inset space ~
33674 \begin_layout Standard
33675 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33676 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33679 \begin_layout Standard
33680 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33681 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33683 \begin_inset space ~
33687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33689 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33693 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33696 \begin_layout Standard
33697 \begin_inset Float figure
33703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33706 \begin_inset Tabular
33707 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33708 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33709 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33710 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33711 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33713 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33731 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33742 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33760 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33771 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33775 The normal text on the page goes here.
33776 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33778 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33779 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33784 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33793 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33804 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33822 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33833 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33851 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33869 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33874 name "fig:Page-layout"
33878 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33891 \begin_layout Standard
33892 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33900 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33904 \begin_inset space ~
33909 is set to “Default”.
33910 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33919 \begin_layout Subsection
33923 \begin_layout Standard
33924 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33925 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33926 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33927 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33929 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33931 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33934 \begin_layout Standard
33935 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33936 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33942 \begin_inset space ~
33950 \begin_layout Description
33953 thepage prints the current page number
33956 \begin_layout Description
33959 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33962 \begin_layout Description
33965 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33968 \begin_layout Description
33971 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33972 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33979 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33982 because it usually goes in a left header.
33985 \begin_layout Description
33988 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33989 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33991 It is normally used in the right header.
33994 \begin_layout Subsection
33995 Default header/footer
33998 \begin_layout Standard
33999 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34000 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34001 footer has the page number.
34002 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34003 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34004 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34007 \begin_inset space ~
34015 \begin_layout Subsection
34019 \begin_layout Standard
34020 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34021 Some pages are different.
34022 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34023 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
34024 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
34025 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
34026 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
34029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34030 Header and footer decoration line
34033 \begin_layout Standard
34034 By default, you get a 0.4
34035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34038 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
34039 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
34051 in the following way:
34054 \begin_layout Standard
34061 headrulewidth}{thickness}
34064 \begin_layout Standard
34065 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34078 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34085 \begin_layout Standard
34086 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34088 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34089 \begin_inset space ~
34093 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34103 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34104 Several header/footer lines
34107 \begin_layout Standard
34108 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34109 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34110 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34112 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34130 \begin_inset space ~
34138 \begin_layout Standard
34145 headheight}{height}
34148 \begin_layout Standard
34153 is a size in standard units (e.
34154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34158 \begin_inset space \space{}
34166 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34167 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34168 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34169 logfile with the menu
34171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34173 \begin_inset space ~
34181 \begin_inset space ~
34186 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34191 \begin_inset Index idx
34194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34196 -packages ! fancyhdr
34202 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34203 for your header/footer.
34206 \begin_layout Subsection
34210 \begin_layout Standard
34211 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34212 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34213 This example consists of the following definition:
34216 \begin_layout Description
34218 \begin_inset space ~
34227 , empty optional argument
34230 \begin_layout Description
34232 \begin_inset space ~
34235 Header empty, empty optional argument
34238 \begin_layout Description
34240 \begin_inset space ~
34249 in the optional argument
34252 \begin_layout Description
34254 \begin_inset space ~
34263 in the optional argument
34266 \begin_layout Description
34268 \begin_inset space ~
34281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34285 \begin_inset Newline newline
34289 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34296 in the optional argument
34299 \begin_layout Description
34301 \begin_inset space ~
34310 , empty optional argument
34313 \begin_layout Description
34316 headrulewidth set to 2
34317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34323 \begin_layout Standard
34324 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34325 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34331 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34341 \begin_layout Standard
34342 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34348 \begin_layout Standard
34352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34356 pagestyle{headings}
34362 \begin_inset Note Note
34365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34366 switches back to page style with the default headings
34374 \begin_layout Section
34375 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34378 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34383 \begin_inset Index idx
34386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34393 \begin_inset Index idx
34396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34405 \begin_layout Standard
34407 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34408 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34409 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34412 \begin_layout Subsection
34416 \begin_layout Standard
34417 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34423 \begin_inset Index idx
34426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34428 -packages ! preview-latex
34433 (on some systems named simply
34438 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34440 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34447 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34449 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34457 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34458 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34459 -package are automatically
34460 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34464 \begin_layout Subsection
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34469 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34470 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34472 activate the option
34475 \begin_inset space ~
34482 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34488 \begin_inset space ~
34492 \begin_inset space ~
34495 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34502 \begin_inset space ~
34515 \begin_inset space ~
34520 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34523 \begin_layout Standard
34524 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34529 \begin_inset space ~
34537 \begin_inset space ~
34545 \begin_layout Standard
34546 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34547 and when you finish
34551 \begin_layout Standard
34552 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34560 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34561 generated by activating the option
34564 \begin_inset space ~
34570 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34578 \begin_layout Subsection
34579 Selected document parts
34582 \begin_layout Standard
34583 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34584 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34585 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34586 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34588 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34594 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34595 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34596 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34599 \begin_layout Standard
34600 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34607 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34619 is explained in section
34621 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34626 \begin_inset space ~
34636 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34637 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34638 the final rotated boxes,
34639 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34640 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34642 Here is the result:
34645 \begin_layout Standard
34646 \begin_inset Preview
34648 \begin_layout Standard
34653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34657 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34663 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34673 height_special "totalheight"
34678 backgroundcolor "none"
34681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34706 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34712 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34734 \begin_layout Standard
34735 Previewing works also for colors.
34736 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34755 is explained in section
34762 \begin_inset space ~
34775 \begin_layout Standard
34776 \begin_inset Preview
34778 \begin_layout Standard
34782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34801 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34806 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34825 \begin_layout Standard
34826 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34832 \begin_layout Standard
34833 If \SpecialChar LyX
34834 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34835 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34836 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34837 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34838 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34839 the \SpecialChar TeX
34841 If \SpecialChar LyX
34842 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34843 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34845 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34846 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34847 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34850 \begin_layout Subsection
34855 \begin_layout Standard
34856 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34857 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34860 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34862 \begin_inset space ~
34867 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34869 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34871 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34872 's main window, then only this selection
34873 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34874 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34875 the source view window.
34880 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34881 ; but note that if you have
34882 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34884 not just the one which is open at the time.
34887 \begin_layout Section
34888 Advanced Find and Replace
34889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34891 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34896 \begin_inset Index idx
34899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34906 \begin_inset Index idx
34909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34918 \begin_layout Subsection
34922 \begin_layout Standard
34923 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34924 allows for searching of complex,
34925 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34927 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34928 The key-features are:
34931 \begin_layout Itemize
34932 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34933 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34934 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34938 \begin_layout Itemize
34939 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34940 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34941 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34942 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34945 \begin_layout Itemize
34946 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34947 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34948 outside of mathematics environments
34951 \begin_layout Itemize
34952 Search may be widened to a specific
34957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34961 \begin_inset space ~
34964 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34965 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34972 \begin_layout Itemize
34973 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34974 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34979 \begin_inset space ~
34982 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34985 \begin_layout Subsection
34989 \begin_layout Standard
34990 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34992 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35005 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35008 ) or the toolbar button
35011 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35017 Advanced Find and Replace
35022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35026 \begin_layout Standard
35032 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
35036 \begin_inset space ~
35041 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
35044 arg "paragraph-break"
35048 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
35049 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
35053 arg "paragraph-break"
35056 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
35060 searches backwards.
35063 \begin_layout Standard
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35072 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35086 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35090 Searching for mathematics
35093 \begin_layout Standard
35094 Mathematical formulas, such as
35095 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35098 or something more complex like
35099 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35102 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35107 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35108 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35109 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35110 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35120 \begin_layout Standard
35121 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35122 This is done by switching to the
35126 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35131 This way, entering in the
35138 \begin_layout Itemize
35139 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35140 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35143 \begin_layout Itemize
35144 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35145 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35148 \begin_layout Itemize
35149 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35150 of it only within section headings.
35151 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35152 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35156 \begin_layout Itemize
35157 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35158 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35166 The entries made in the
35170 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35173 \begin_inset space ~
35179 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35183 button or alternatively press
35186 arg "paragraph-break"
35193 while the cursor is in the
35196 \begin_inset space ~
35204 \begin_layout Standard
35205 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35207 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35211 \begin_layout Itemize
35212 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35213 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35221 with its typewriter version
35222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35236 \begin_layout Itemize
35237 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35243 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35255 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35262 (you may want to enable the
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35273 \begin_inset space ~
35278 options and disable the
35286 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35294 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35295 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35299 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35302 , or occurrences of
35303 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35307 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35313 \begin_layout Subsection
35317 \begin_layout Standard
35318 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35323 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35325 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35327 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35337 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35343 This is done with the context menu
35345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35346 Insert Regular Expression
35348 while the cursor is in the
35353 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35354 expression matching rules
35358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35359 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35366 \begin_inset space ~
35369 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35370 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35376 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35377 same text in the document.
35378 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35379 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35382 \begin_layout Enumerate
35383 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35388 editor the fraction
35389 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35393 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35396 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35397 fractions with the given denominator.
35400 \begin_layout Enumerate
35401 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35413 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35418 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35419 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35420 Also, by inserting a
35421 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35424 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35425 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35428 \begin_layout Standard
35429 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35430 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35431 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35434 , and referring back to them through
35435 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35439 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35443 For example, try searching with the regexp
35444 \begin_inset Newline newline
35447 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35450 \begin_inset Newline newline
35453 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35456 \begin_layout Standard
35457 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35460 \begin_layout Standard
35461 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35469 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35470 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35471 sub-expressions is absolute.
35473 \begin_inset space ~
35477 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35480 always refers to the first occurrence of
35481 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35484 in all entered regexps.
35492 \begin_layout Section
35494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35496 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35501 \begin_inset Index idx
35504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35513 \begin_layout Standard
35515 has a built-in spell checker.
35518 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35525 key or the toolbar button
35528 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35531 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35532 beginning of the currently selected text.
35533 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35534 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35535 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35536 scrolled so that it is visible.
35537 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35538 n, if any could be found.
35539 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35543 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35544 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35547 \begin_layout Standard
35548 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35555 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35556 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35558 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35559 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35562 \begin_inset space ~
35570 arg "dialog-show character"
35573 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35575 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35578 \begin_layout Standard
35579 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35580 can be downloaded from here:
35581 \begin_inset Newline newline
35585 \begin_inset Flex URL
35588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35590 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35596 \begin_inset Newline newline
35600 \begin_inset space ~
35603 files for each language.
35604 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35605 \begin_inset space ~
35608 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35609 's installation subfolder
35617 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35619 \begin_inset Newline newline
35622 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35623 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35624 but in most cases these are
35640 is the language code.
35643 \begin_layout Subsection
35647 \begin_layout Standard
35650 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35651 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35653 \begin_inset space ~
35656 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35659 you can set the following things:
35662 \begin_layout Description
35664 \begin_inset space ~
35667 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35668 should use for spell checking.
35669 Depending on your platform,
35683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35684 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35685 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35700 \begin_inset space ~
35703 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35706 \begin_layout Description
35708 \begin_inset space ~
35711 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35712 will always use the given language
35713 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35716 \begin_layout Description
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35721 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35727 \begin_inset space \space{}
35731 This should normally not be needed.
35734 \begin_layout Description
35736 \begin_inset space ~
35740 \begin_inset space ~
35743 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35755 \begin_layout Description
35757 \begin_inset space ~
35760 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35761 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35762 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35763 appear in a context menu.
35764 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35768 \begin_layout Description
35770 \begin_inset space ~
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35778 \begin_inset space ~
35781 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35785 \begin_layout Section
35787 \begin_inset Index idx
35790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35799 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35806 \begin_layout Standard
35808 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35809 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35819 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35821 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35831 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35833 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35834 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35835 which are available for many languages.
35838 \begin_layout Standard
35839 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35840 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35844 \begin_layout Subsection
35845 Setting up the thesaurus
35848 \begin_layout Standard
35857 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35861 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35866 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35872 \begin_inset space ~
35880 For instance, the US English files are named:
35883 \begin_layout Itemize
35887 \begin_layout Itemize
35891 \begin_layout Standard
35900 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35901 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35904 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35905 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35906 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35908 \begin_inset space ~
35913 ) to the path where they are installed.
35917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35918 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35919 ies, typical locations are
35925 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35929 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35933 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35936 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35942 LibreOffice-<Version>
35949 On the Mac, the default location is
35951 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35952 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35953 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35954 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35955 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35956 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35964 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35965 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35966 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35970 \begin_layout Standard
35971 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35972 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35976 \begin_layout Itemize
35977 \begin_inset Flex URL
35980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35982 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35990 \begin_layout Standard
35991 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35992 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35994 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35995 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35996 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35998 \begin_inset space ~
36003 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36005 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36006 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36010 \begin_layout Standard
36011 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36013 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36016 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36022 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36025 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36026 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
36028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36034 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36035 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36036 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36038 \begin_inset space ~
36043 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
36046 \begin_layout Subsection
36047 Using the thesaurus
36050 \begin_layout Standard
36051 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
36053 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36056 or the toolbar button
36059 arg "thesaurus-entry"
36062 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
36064 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
36066 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
36067 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
36068 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36077 ), related terms (such as
36080 \begin_inset space ~
36089 ), compounds (such as
36092 \begin_inset space ~
36101 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36110 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36113 \begin_layout Standard
36114 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36115 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36119 \begin_layout Standard
36120 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36121 the dictionary, such as the above
36125 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36130 \begin_inset space \space{}
36133 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36134 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36135 For example, looking up the word form
36139 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36144 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36149 \begin_inset space \space{}
36160 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36161 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36162 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36165 \begin_layout Section
36167 \begin_inset Index idx
36170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36177 \begin_inset Index idx
36180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36181 Document ! Change Tracking
36187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36189 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36196 \begin_layout Standard
36197 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36198 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36199 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36200 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36202 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36204 \begin_inset space ~
36207 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36209 \begin_inset space ~
36217 \begin_layout Standard
36218 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36232 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36233 You can change the color in
36235 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36236 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36242 \begin_inset space ~
36247 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36253 \begin_inset Index idx
36256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36257 Color ! Change tracking
36262 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36263 's status bar when the
36264 cursor is in changed text.
36265 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36268 arg "changes-merge"
36274 \begin_layout Standard
36275 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36277 \begin_inset Index idx
36280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36289 \begin_layout Standard
36290 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36296 \begin_layout Standard
36297 \begin_inset Graphics
36298 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36306 \begin_layout Standard
36307 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36313 \begin_layout Standard
36314 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36317 \begin_layout Standard
36318 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36324 \begin_layout Standard
36325 \begin_inset Tabular
36326 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36327 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36328 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36329 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36330 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36339 arg "changes-track"
36347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36355 \begin_inset space ~
36358 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36360 \begin_inset space ~
36369 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36378 arg "changes-output"
36386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36392 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36394 \begin_inset space ~
36397 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36399 \begin_inset space ~
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36407 \begin_inset space ~
36416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36437 Jumps to the next change
36443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36452 arg "change-accept"
36460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36468 \begin_inset space ~
36471 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36473 \begin_inset space ~
36482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36491 arg "change-reject"
36499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36510 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36512 \begin_inset space ~
36521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36530 arg "changes-merge"
36538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36546 \begin_inset space ~
36549 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36551 \begin_inset space ~
36560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36569 arg "all-changes-accept"
36577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36583 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36585 \begin_inset space ~
36588 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36590 \begin_inset space ~
36594 \begin_inset space ~
36603 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36612 arg "all-changes-reject"
36620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36626 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36628 \begin_inset space ~
36631 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36633 \begin_inset space ~
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36670 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36672 \begin_inset space ~
36681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36722 \begin_layout Standard
36723 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36729 \begin_layout Standard
36730 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36750 \begin_layout Standard
36751 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36752 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36753 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36754 the next change after the current cursor position.
36755 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36756 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36757 step to the next change.
36758 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36761 \begin_layout Standard
36762 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36763 to describe a change.
36766 \begin_layout Standard
36767 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36773 \begin_inset Index idx
36776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36778 -packages ! dvipost
36784 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36786 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36793 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36797 \begin_layout Section
36798 Comparison of Documents
36799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36801 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36806 \begin_inset Index idx
36809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36810 Comparison of documents
36818 \begin_layout Standard
36819 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36822 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36826 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36827 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36829 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36831 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36835 \begin_inset space ~
36839 \begin_inset space ~
36843 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36860 \begin_inset space ~
36864 \begin_inset space ~
36868 \begin_inset space ~
36872 \begin_inset space ~
36877 enables the change tracking option
36880 \begin_inset space ~
36884 \begin_inset space ~
36888 \begin_inset space ~
36893 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36896 \begin_layout Section
36897 International Support
36898 \begin_inset Index idx
36901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36902 International support
36910 \begin_layout Standard
36911 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36912 with any language you want.
36913 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36914 up \SpecialChar LyX
36916 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36918 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36926 \begin_layout Standard
36927 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36928 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36929 \begin_inset space ~
36933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36935 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36942 \begin_layout Subsection
36944 \begin_inset Index idx
36947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36954 \begin_inset Index idx
36957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36958 Document ! Settings
36964 \begin_inset Index idx
36967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36968 Document ! Language
36976 \begin_layout Standard
36979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36980 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36983 dialog lets you set
36985 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36990 \begin_layout Standard
36995 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37000 \begin_inset space ~
37005 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37006 For details about the different encoding options see section
37007 \begin_inset space ~
37011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37013 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37020 \begin_layout Subsection
37021 Keyboard mapping configuration
37022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37024 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 If you have for example a U.
37033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37036 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
37037 can use an alternate keymap.
37038 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
37043 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37044 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37045 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
37048 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
37049 \begin_inset space ~
37053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37055 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
37060 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
37061 which one you want to use.
37064 \begin_layout Standard
37065 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
37066 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
37067 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
37068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37071 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37072 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37073 one to support the characters you want.
37074 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37081 \begin_layout Chapter
37084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37086 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37093 \begin_layout Standard
37094 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37095 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37096 topic inside the user's guide.
37099 \begin_layout Section
37101 \begin_inset Index idx
37104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37113 \begin_layout Standard
37118 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37121 \begin_layout Subsection
37125 \begin_layout Standard
37126 Creates a new document.
37129 \begin_layout Subsection
37133 \begin_layout Standard
37134 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37135 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37136 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37139 \begin_layout Subsection
37143 \begin_layout Standard
37147 \begin_layout Subsection
37151 \begin_layout Standard
37152 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37153 Click there on a file to open it.
37156 \begin_layout Subsection
37160 \begin_layout Standard
37161 Closes the current document.
37164 \begin_layout Subsection
37168 \begin_layout Standard
37169 Closes all opened documents.
37172 \begin_layout Subsection
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37177 Saves the actual document.
37180 \begin_layout Subsection
37184 \begin_layout Standard
37185 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37188 \begin_layout Subsection
37192 \begin_layout Standard
37193 Saves all opened documents.
37196 \begin_layout Subsection
37200 \begin_layout Standard
37201 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37204 \begin_layout Subsection
37208 \begin_layout Standard
37209 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37210 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37211 It is described in the section
37213 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37218 Additional Features
37223 \begin_layout Subsection
37227 \begin_layout Standard
37228 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37229 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37231 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37232 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37236 \begin_layout Standard
37237 When using the menu entry
37240 \begin_inset space ~
37245 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37249 \begin_inset space ~
37253 \begin_inset space ~
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37262 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37263 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37266 \begin_layout Subsection
37268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37270 name "subsec:Export"
37277 \begin_layout Standard
37278 You can export your document to various file formats.
37279 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37281 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37282 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37283 during its configuration.
37286 \begin_layout Standard
37287 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37289 \begin_inset space ~
37293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37295 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37302 \begin_layout Description
37308 \begin_inset space ~
37311 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37313 \begin_inset space ~
37316 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37317 \begin_inset Newline newline
37320 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37321 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37325 \begin_layout Description
37326 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37332 \begin_layout Description
37334 \begin_inset space ~
37337 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37343 \begin_layout Description
37344 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37345 's native DVI-format.
37346 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37347 files paths or file names in your document.
37349 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37356 \begin_layout Description
37357 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37358 in files paths or file names
37361 \begin_layout Description
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37370 ) DVI-format using the program
37372 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37375 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37379 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37387 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37395 \begin_layout Description
37397 \begin_inset space ~
37400 (cropped) the same as
37404 but with cropped page margins.
37407 \begin_layout Description
37409 \begin_inset space ~
37412 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37416 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37421 \begin_layout Description
37425 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37433 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37441 \begin_layout Description
37443 \begin_inset space ~
37447 \begin_inset space ~
37450 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37454 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37462 \begin_layout Description
37466 \begin_inset space ~
37475 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37476 source that is compilable with the program
37478 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37482 \begin_layout Description
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37491 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37492 source, additionally all images used in the document
37493 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37497 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37500 \begin_layout Description
37504 \begin_inset space ~
37509 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37510 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37511 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37519 \begin_layout Description
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37532 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37533 source that is compilable with the program
37539 \begin_layout Description
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37545 \begin_inset space ~
37552 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37553 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37559 \begin_layout Description
37561 \begin_inset space ~
37564 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37565 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37571 \begin_inset space \space{}
37576 \begin_inset space ~
37580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37595 represent the version number)
37598 \begin_layout Description
37600 \begin_inset space ~
37604 \begin_inset space ~
37607 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37608 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37609 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37613 \begin_layout Description
37614 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37615 's internal XHTML engine
37618 \begin_layout Description
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37624 \begin_inset space ~
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37632 \begin_inset space ~
37635 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37640 For the conversion the program
37649 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37652 \begin_layout Description
37653 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37658 \begin_layout Description
37660 \begin_inset space ~
37663 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37665 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37668 For the conversion the program
37677 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37680 \begin_layout Description
37682 \begin_inset space ~
37685 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37686 For the conversion the program
37695 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37698 \begin_layout Description
37700 \begin_inset space ~
37703 (cropped) the same as
37706 \begin_inset space ~
37711 but with cropped page margins
37714 \begin_layout Description
37718 \begin_inset space ~
37723 PDF-format using the program
37727 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37730 \begin_layout Description
37734 \begin_inset space ~
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37746 \begin_inset space ~
37751 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37756 \begin_inset space \space{}
37759 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37763 \begin_layout Description
37767 \begin_inset space ~
37772 PDF-format using the program
37774 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37777 , produces PDF-files directly
37780 \begin_layout Description
37784 \begin_inset space ~
37789 PDF-format using the program
37793 , produces PDF-files directly
37796 \begin_layout Description
37800 \begin_inset space ~
37805 PDF-format using the program
37809 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37812 \begin_layout Description
37816 \begin_inset space ~
37821 PDF-format using the program
37826 , produces PDF-files directly
37829 \begin_layout Description
37833 \begin_inset space ~
37841 \begin_layout Description
37845 \begin_inset space ~
37849 \begin_inset space ~
37854 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37855 and then exported as text using the program
37860 \begin_layout Description
37865 PostScript format using the program
37873 options see section
37874 \begin_inset space ~
37878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37880 reference "subsec:General-output"
37887 \begin_layout Description
37888 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37889 source and also code in the statistical programming
37903 it is possible to use
37907 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37911 \begin_layout Standard
37912 If one of the menu entries
37919 \begin_inset space ~
37928 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37930 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37932 \begin_inset space ~
37936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37938 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37943 \begin_inset Index idx
37946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37947 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37956 \begin_layout Subsection
37960 \begin_layout Standard
37961 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37962 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37971 reference "sec:Paths"
37976 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37985 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37986 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37987 's preferences as described in section
37988 \begin_inset space ~
37992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37994 reference "subsec:Converters"
38001 \begin_layout Subsection
38002 New and Close Window
38005 \begin_layout Standard
38006 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38010 \begin_layout Subsection
38014 \begin_layout Standard
38015 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38018 \begin_layout Section
38020 \begin_inset Index idx
38023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38032 \begin_layout Subsection
38036 \begin_layout Standard
38037 Described in section
38038 \begin_inset space ~
38042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38044 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
38051 \begin_layout Subsection
38052 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
38055 \begin_layout Standard
38056 Described in section
38057 \begin_inset space ~
38061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38063 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38070 \begin_layout Subsection
38074 \begin_layout Standard
38075 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38076 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38079 \begin_layout Subsection
38083 \begin_layout Standard
38084 Selects the whole document.
38087 \begin_layout Subsection
38088 Find & Replace (Quick)
38091 \begin_layout Standard
38092 Described in section
38093 \begin_inset space ~
38097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38099 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38106 \begin_layout Subsection
38107 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38110 \begin_layout Standard
38111 Described in section
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38118 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38125 \begin_layout Subsection
38126 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38129 \begin_layout Standard
38130 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38134 \begin_layout Subsection
38138 \begin_layout Standard
38139 Described in section
38140 \begin_inset space ~
38144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38146 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38153 \begin_layout Subsection
38155 \begin_inset Index idx
38158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38159 Paragraph ! Settings
38167 \begin_layout Standard
38168 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38169 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38173 \begin_layout Standard
38174 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38175 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38181 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38182 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38184 \begin_inset space ~
38192 \begin_layout Subsection
38193 Table and Rows & Columns
38196 \begin_layout Standard
38197 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38198 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38199 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38202 \begin_layout Subsection
38206 \begin_layout Standard
38207 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38208 It will dissolve this inset.
38209 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38213 \begin_layout Subsection
38217 \begin_layout Standard
38218 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38219 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38222 \begin_layout Subsection
38223 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38226 \begin_layout Standard
38227 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38229 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38230 \begin_inset space ~
38234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38236 reference "sec:Nesting"
38241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38243 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38250 \begin_layout Subsection
38253 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38256 \begin_layout Standard
38257 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38258 nts of the same type.
38260 \begin_inset space ~
38264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38266 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38270 for an explanation.
38273 \begin_layout Section
38275 \begin_inset Index idx
38278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38287 \begin_layout Standard
38288 At the bottom of the
38292 menu the opened documents are listed.
38295 \begin_layout Subsection
38296 Open/Close all Insets
38299 \begin_layout Standard
38300 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38303 \begin_layout Subsection
38304 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38307 \begin_layout Standard
38308 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38311 \begin_layout Standard
38312 Math macros are described in the
38319 \begin_layout Subsection
38323 \begin_layout Standard
38324 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38325 \begin_inset space ~
38329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38331 reference "sec:Navigating"
38336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38338 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38345 \begin_layout Subsection
38349 \begin_layout Standard
38350 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38352 \begin_inset space ~
38356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38358 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38365 \begin_layout Subsection
38369 \begin_layout Standard
38370 Opens a window showing console messages.
38371 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38376 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38377 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38378 is processing the document.
38381 \begin_layout Subsection
38383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38385 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38390 \begin_inset Index idx
38393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38402 \begin_layout Standard
38403 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38404 All toolbars and the
38407 \begin_inset space ~
38412 can be turned on and off.
38417 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38429 \begin_inset space ~
38441 \begin_inset space ~
38446 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38450 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38457 \begin_layout Standard
38462 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38466 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38467 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38468 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38469 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38470 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38473 \begin_layout Standard
38475 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38476 \begin_inset space ~
38480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38482 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38489 \begin_layout Subsection
38493 \begin_layout Standard
38497 \begin_inset space ~
38501 \begin_inset space ~
38505 \begin_inset space ~
38509 \begin_inset space ~
38513 \begin_inset space ~
38517 \begin_inset space ~
38522 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38523 's main window vertically while
38526 \begin_inset space ~
38530 \begin_inset space ~
38534 \begin_inset space ~
38538 \begin_inset space ~
38542 \begin_inset space ~
38546 \begin_inset space ~
38551 will split it horizontally.
38552 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38553 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38554 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38555 three or more documents at the same time.
38556 To close a split view, use the menu
38559 \begin_inset space ~
38563 \begin_inset space ~
38571 \begin_layout Subsection
38575 \begin_layout Standard
38576 Closes a split view.
38579 \begin_layout Subsection
38583 \begin_layout Standard
38584 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38585 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38586 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38587 's main window fullscreen.
38588 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38589 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38592 \begin_layout Section
38594 \begin_inset Index idx
38597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38606 \begin_layout Subsection
38610 \begin_layout Standard
38611 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38612 \begin_inset space ~
38616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38618 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38629 \begin_layout Subsection
38631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38633 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38640 \begin_layout Standard
38641 Here you can insert the following characters:
38644 \begin_layout Description
38649 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38652 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38653 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38654 -packages you have installed.
38655 You can get a complete display by checking
38658 \begin_inset space ~
38664 \begin_inset Newline newline
38668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38676 Not all characters will be visible in the
38680 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38681 dialog (see section
38682 \begin_inset space ~
38686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38688 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38692 ) can display every character.
38700 \begin_layout Description
38701 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38705 \begin_layout Description
38707 \begin_inset space ~
38711 \begin_inset space ~
38714 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38715 \begin_inset space ~
38719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38721 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38728 \begin_layout Description
38730 \begin_inset space ~
38733 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38736 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38737 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38743 \begin_layout Description
38745 \begin_inset space ~
38748 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38752 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38758 \begin_layout Description
38760 \begin_inset space ~
38763 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38767 \begin_layout Description
38769 \begin_inset space ~
38772 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38776 \begin_layout Description
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38781 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38787 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38793 \begin_layout Description
38795 \begin_inset space ~
38798 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38802 \begin_layout Description
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38808 \begin_inset Index idx
38811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38818 \begin_inset Index idx
38821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38822 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38827 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38828 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38830 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38836 \begin_inset Index idx
38839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38847 \begin_inset Newline newline
38850 More information about this feature can be found in the
38856 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38862 \begin_layout Description
38863 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38865 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38866 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38870 \begin_layout Subsection
38874 \begin_layout Standard
38875 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38878 \begin_layout Description
38879 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38880 \begin_inset script superscript
38882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38891 \begin_layout Description
38892 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38893 \begin_inset script subscript
38895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38904 \begin_layout Description
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38909 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38910 \begin_inset space ~
38914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38916 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38923 \begin_layout Description
38925 \begin_inset space ~
38928 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38929 \begin_inset space ~
38933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38935 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38942 \begin_layout Description
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38947 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38954 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38961 \begin_layout Description
38963 \begin_inset space ~
38966 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38972 \begin_inset space \space{}
38975 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38976 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38985 To insert a fraction use the command
38990 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38994 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
39000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39003 The visible space is hereby the character before the
39010 \begin_layout Description
39012 \begin_inset space ~
39015 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
39016 \begin_inset space ~
39020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39022 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
39029 \begin_layout Description
39031 \begin_inset space ~
39034 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
39035 \begin_inset space ~
39039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39041 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
39048 \begin_layout Description
39050 \begin_inset space ~
39053 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
39054 \begin_inset space ~
39058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39060 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
39067 \begin_layout Description
39068 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
39069 \begin_inset space ~
39073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39075 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39082 \begin_layout Description
39084 \begin_inset space ~
39087 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39088 \begin_inset space ~
39092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39094 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39101 \begin_layout Description
39103 \begin_inset space ~
39106 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39107 \begin_inset space ~
39111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39113 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39120 \begin_layout Description
39122 \begin_inset space ~
39126 \begin_inset space ~
39129 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39130 \begin_inset space ~
39134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39136 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39143 \begin_layout Description
39145 \begin_inset space ~
39148 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39149 as described in section
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39156 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39163 \begin_layout Description
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39168 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39175 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39182 \begin_layout Description
39184 \begin_inset space ~
39187 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39188 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39190 \begin_inset space ~
39194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39196 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39203 \begin_layout Description
39205 \begin_inset space ~
39208 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39209 \begin_inset space ~
39213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39215 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39222 \begin_layout Description
39224 \begin_inset space ~
39228 \begin_inset space ~
39231 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39232 \begin_inset space ~
39236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39238 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39245 \begin_layout Subsection
39249 \begin_layout Standard
39250 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39254 \begin_inset space ~
39275 are described in section
39276 \begin_inset space ~
39280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39282 reference "sec:toc"
39291 is described in section
39292 \begin_inset space ~
39296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39298 reference "sec:Index"
39306 is described in section
39307 \begin_inset space ~
39311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39313 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39319 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39322 is described in section
39323 \begin_inset space ~
39327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39329 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39336 \begin_layout Subsection
39340 \begin_layout Standard
39341 To insert floats, as described in section
39342 \begin_inset space ~
39346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39348 reference "sec:Floats"
39352 and in detail the chapter
39359 \begin_inset space ~
39367 \begin_layout Subsection
39371 \begin_layout Standard
39372 To insert notes, described in section
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39379 reference "sec:Notes"
39386 \begin_layout Subsection
39390 \begin_layout Standard
39391 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39393 Branches are described in section
39394 \begin_inset space ~
39398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39400 reference "sec:Branches"
39407 \begin_layout Subsection
39411 \begin_layout Standard
39412 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39413 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39415 An example is the document class
39416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39423 with three custom insets.
39426 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39430 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39436 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39439 \begin_layout Subsection
39441 \begin_inset Index idx
39444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39453 \begin_layout Standard
39454 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39456 For more information see chapter
39458 External Document Parts
39461 \begin_inset space ~
39467 \begin_layout Subsection
39469 \begin_inset Index idx
39472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39481 \begin_layout Standard
39482 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39483 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39490 \begin_inset space ~
39498 \begin_layout Subsection
39502 \begin_layout Standard
39507 dialog as described in section
39508 \begin_inset space ~
39512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39514 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39521 \begin_layout Subsection
39525 \begin_layout Standard
39530 as described in section
39531 \begin_inset space ~
39535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39537 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39544 \begin_layout Subsection
39548 \begin_layout Standard
39553 as described in section
39554 \begin_inset space ~
39558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39560 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39567 \begin_layout Subsection
39569 \begin_inset Index idx
39572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39579 \begin_inset Index idx
39582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39583 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39591 \begin_layout Standard
39592 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39593 Floats are described in section
39594 \begin_inset space ~
39598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39600 reference "sec:Floats"
39604 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39606 Multi-page Captions
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39619 \begin_layout Subsection
39623 \begin_layout Standard
39624 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39625 \begin_inset space ~
39629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39631 reference "sec:Index"
39638 \begin_layout Subsection
39642 \begin_layout Standard
39643 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39644 \begin_inset space ~
39648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39650 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39657 \begin_layout Subsection
39661 \begin_layout Standard
39662 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39663 Tables are described in section
39664 \begin_inset space ~
39668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39670 reference "sec:Tables"
39674 and in detail in the chapter
39681 \begin_inset space ~
39689 \begin_layout Subsection
39693 \begin_layout Standard
39699 Graphics are described in section
39700 \begin_inset space ~
39704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39706 reference "sec:Graphics"
39713 \begin_layout Subsection
39717 \begin_layout Standard
39718 Inserts a URL as described in section
39719 \begin_inset space ~
39723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39725 reference "subsec:URLs"
39732 \begin_layout Subsection
39736 \begin_layout Standard
39737 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39738 \begin_inset space ~
39742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39744 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39751 \begin_layout Subsection
39755 \begin_layout Standard
39756 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39757 \begin_inset space ~
39761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39763 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39770 \begin_layout Subsection
39774 \begin_layout Standard
39775 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39776 \begin_inset space ~
39780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39782 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39789 \begin_layout Subsection
39793 \begin_layout Standard
39794 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39795 title or caption of a float.
39796 Inserts a short title as described in section
39797 \begin_inset space ~
39801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39803 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39810 \begin_layout Subsection
39815 \begin_layout Standard
39816 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39817 Code box as described in section
39818 \begin_inset space ~
39822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39824 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39831 \begin_layout Subsection
39833 \begin_inset Index idx
39836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39845 \begin_layout Standard
39846 Inserts a program listings box.
39847 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39849 Program Code Listings
39854 \begin_inset space ~
39862 \begin_layout Subsection
39866 \begin_layout Standard
39867 Inserts the actual date.
39868 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39872 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39880 \begin_inset space ~
39888 \begin_layout Subsection
39892 \begin_layout Standard
39893 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39894 \begin_inset space ~
39898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39900 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39907 \begin_layout Section
39909 \begin_inset Index idx
39912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39921 \begin_layout Standard
39922 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39923 \begin_inset space ~
39926 of the current document.
39927 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39930 \begin_layout Subsection
39934 \begin_layout Standard
39935 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39936 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39937 to jump, for example, between section
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39942 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39946 2.5 and use the submenu
39949 \begin_inset space ~
39953 \begin_inset space ~
39960 \begin_inset space ~
39966 \begin_inset space ~
39970 \begin_inset space ~
39976 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39980 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39986 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39989 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39992 \begin_layout Standard
39993 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39997 \begin_inset space ~
40002 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
40005 \begin_inset space ~
40010 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
40013 \begin_layout Subsection
40014 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
40017 \begin_layout Standard
40018 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
40022 \begin_layout Subsection
40026 \begin_layout Standard
40027 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
40028 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
40029 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
40033 \begin_inset space ~
40037 \begin_inset space ~
40045 \begin_layout Subsection
40049 \begin_layout Standard
40050 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
40053 The \SpecialChar LyX
40054 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
40056 \begin_inset space ~
40064 \begin_inset space ~
40069 manual for a detailed description.
40072 \begin_layout Section
40074 \begin_inset Index idx
40077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40086 \begin_layout Subsection
40090 \begin_layout Standard
40091 Change Tracking is described in section
40092 \begin_inset space ~
40096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40098 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40105 \begin_layout Subsection
40113 \begin_layout Standard
40114 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40115 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40116 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40118 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40119 to the clipboard or update the view.
40120 \begin_inset Newline newline
40123 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40127 \begin_layout Standard
40130 Open Containing Directory
40132 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40133 's temporary folder for the document.
40134 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40135 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40136 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40137 For example some journals require to send the
40141 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40145 \begin_layout Subsection
40146 Start Appendix Here
40149 \begin_layout Standard
40150 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40151 as described in section
40152 \begin_inset space ~
40156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40158 reference "sec:Appendices"
40165 \begin_layout Subsection
40167 \begin_inset space ~
40173 \begin_layout Standard
40174 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40175 default output format for the document (menu
40177 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40178 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40179 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40181 \begin_inset space ~
40185 \begin_inset space ~
40191 \begin_inset space ~
40195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40197 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40201 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40204 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40205 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40207 \begin_inset space ~
40210 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40212 \begin_inset space ~
40215 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40221 \begin_inset space ~
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40233 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40237 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40238 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40240 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40241 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40246 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40248 \begin_inset space ~
40251 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40261 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40266 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40267 when it is first configured.
40268 The default output format is
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40279 \begin_layout Subsection
40280 View (Other Formats)
40283 \begin_layout Standard
40284 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40285 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40286 actual document with an external program.
40287 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40288 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40289 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40291 All possible formats are listed in section
40292 \begin_inset space ~
40296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40298 reference "subsec:Export"
40303 You should at least see the menu entry
40308 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40310 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40312 \begin_inset space ~
40316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40318 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40323 \begin_inset Index idx
40326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40327 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40336 \begin_layout Standard
40337 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40338 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40340 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40341 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40343 \begin_inset space ~
40346 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40351 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40361 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40366 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40367 when it is first configured.
40370 \begin_layout Subsection
40372 \begin_inset space ~
40378 \begin_layout Standard
40379 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40380 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40383 \begin_layout Subsection
40384 Update (Other Formats)
40387 \begin_layout Standard
40388 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40389 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40392 \begin_layout Subsection
40393 View Master Document
40396 \begin_layout Standard
40397 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40413 \begin_inset space ~
40418 manual for more information on this topic).
40419 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40420 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40424 \begin_inset space ~
40428 \begin_inset space ~
40433 generates the output of the whole book, while
40437 will just output the chapter alone.
40440 \begin_layout Standard
40441 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40442 in the document settings (menu
40444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40445 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40446 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40452 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40464 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40468 ) or in the preferences (menu
40470 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40471 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40473 \begin_inset space ~
40476 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40481 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40499 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40506 \begin_layout Subsection
40507 Update Master Document
40510 \begin_layout Standard
40511 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40527 \begin_inset space ~
40532 manual for more information on this topic).
40533 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40534 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40537 \begin_layout Standard
40538 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40539 in the document settings (menu
40541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40542 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40543 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40545 \begin_inset space ~
40549 \begin_inset space ~
40555 \begin_inset space ~
40559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40561 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40565 ) or in the preferences (menu
40567 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40568 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40570 \begin_inset space ~
40573 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40575 \begin_inset space ~
40578 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40580 \begin_inset space ~
40584 \begin_inset space ~
40590 \begin_inset space ~
40594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40596 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40603 \begin_layout Subsection
40605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40607 name "subsec:Compressed"
40614 \begin_layout Standard
40615 Un/compresses the current document.
40616 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40617 compression (see the
40619 Additional Features
40621 manual for details).
40624 \begin_layout Subsection
40628 \begin_layout Standard
40629 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40632 \begin_layout Subsection
40636 \begin_layout Standard
40637 The document settings are described in appendix
40638 \begin_inset space ~
40642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40644 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40651 \begin_layout Section
40653 \begin_inset Index idx
40656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40665 \begin_layout Subsection
40669 \begin_layout Standard
40670 Spell checking is explained in section
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40677 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40684 \begin_layout Subsection
40688 \begin_layout Standard
40689 The thesaurus is described in section
40690 \begin_inset space ~
40694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40696 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40703 \begin_layout Subsection
40705 \begin_inset Index idx
40708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40715 \begin_inset Index idx
40718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40727 \begin_layout Standard
40728 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40729 the highlighted document part.
40732 \begin_layout Subsection
40738 \begin_inset Index idx
40741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40742 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40751 \begin_layout Standard
40752 Generates with the help of the program
40754 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40757 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40758 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40759 This feature is not available on Windows.
40762 \begin_layout Subsection
40768 \begin_inset Index idx
40771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40781 \begin_layout Standard
40782 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40787 \begin_inset space ~
40792 to see the full filename paths.
40795 \begin_layout Subsection
40797 \begin_inset Index idx
40800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40809 \begin_layout Standard
40810 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40811 files as described in section
40812 \begin_inset space ~
40816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40818 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40825 \begin_layout Subsection
40827 \begin_inset Index idx
40830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40843 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40861 \begin_inset Index idx
40864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40865 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40874 \begin_layout Standard
40875 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40876 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40877 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40878 -packages and programs it needs; see
40880 \begin_inset space ~
40884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40886 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40893 \begin_layout Subsection
40897 \begin_layout Standard
40902 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40903 \begin_inset space ~
40907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40909 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40916 \begin_layout Section
40918 \begin_inset Index idx
40921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40930 \begin_layout Standard
40931 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40932 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40934 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40938 \begin_layout Standard
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40947 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40948 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40949 packages and classes found
40950 by \SpecialChar LyX
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40958 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40965 \begin_layout Standard
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40974 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40979 \begin_layout Section
40981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40983 name "sec:Toolbars"
40990 \begin_layout Standard
40991 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40998 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
41005 \begin_layout Standard
41006 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
41007 This is described in the
41009 Additional Features
41014 \begin_layout Subsection
41016 \begin_inset Index idx
41019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41028 \begin_layout Standard
41029 \begin_inset Graphics
41030 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
41038 \begin_layout Standard
41039 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41045 \begin_layout Standard
41046 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41063 \begin_inset Note Note
41066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41067 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41072 manual for more information.
41080 \begin_layout Standard
41081 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41087 \begin_layout Standard
41088 \begin_inset Tabular
41089 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41090 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41091 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41092 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41098 \begin_inset Graphics
41099 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41113 pull-down box for the environments
41126 \begin_layout Standard
41127 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41133 \begin_layout Standard
41135 \begin_inset Tabular
41136 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41137 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41138 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41139 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41163 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41193 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41223 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41230 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41239 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41253 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41269 arg "spelling-continuously"
41277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41281 Spellcheck continuously
41287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41310 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41340 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41370 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41377 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41400 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41407 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41430 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41437 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41446 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41460 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41479 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41486 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41500 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41528 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41542 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41543 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41571 Emphasize text, function of the
41573 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41575 \begin_inset space ~
41578 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41608 Set text to noun style, function of the
41610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41612 \begin_inset space ~
41615 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41624 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41633 arg "textstyle-apply"
41641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41645 Format text using the current settings in the
41647 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41649 \begin_inset space ~
41652 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41661 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41685 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41687 \begin_inset space ~
41696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41705 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41733 arg "tabular-insert"
41741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41747 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41763 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41775 Toggle outline window on/off,
41777 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41793 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41805 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41820 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41832 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41845 \begin_layout Subsection
41847 \begin_inset Index idx
41850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41859 \begin_layout Standard
41860 \begin_inset Graphics
41861 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41869 \begin_layout Standard
41870 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41876 \begin_layout Standard
41877 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41881 \begin_layout Standard
41882 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41888 \begin_layout Standard
41889 \begin_inset Tabular
41890 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41891 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41892 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41893 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41930 arg "layout Enumerate"
41938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41957 arg "layout Itemize"
41965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41975 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42011 arg "layout Description"
42019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42038 arg "depth-increment"
42046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42052 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42054 \begin_inset space ~
42058 \begin_inset space ~
42067 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42076 arg "depth-decrement"
42084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42090 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42092 \begin_inset space ~
42096 \begin_inset space ~
42105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42114 arg "float-insert figure"
42122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42129 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42145 arg "float-insert table"
42153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42160 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42206 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42227 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42236 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42282 \begin_inset space ~
42291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42300 arg "nomencl-insert"
42308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42316 \begin_inset space ~
42325 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42334 arg "footnote-insert"
42342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42364 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42380 \begin_inset space ~
42389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42412 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42413 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42415 \begin_inset space ~
42424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42433 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42507 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42509 \begin_inset space ~
42518 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42527 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42542 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42558 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42572 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42573 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42575 \begin_inset space ~
42584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42593 arg "dialog-show character"
42601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42609 \begin_inset space ~
42612 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42628 arg "layout-paragraph"
42636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42653 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42662 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42676 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42690 \begin_layout Subsection
42691 View/Update Toolbar
42692 \begin_inset Index idx
42695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42696 Toolbar ! View / Update
42704 \begin_layout Standard
42705 \begin_inset Graphics
42706 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42713 \begin_layout Standard
42714 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42720 \begin_layout Standard
42721 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42725 \begin_layout Standard
42726 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 \begin_inset Tabular
42734 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42735 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42736 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42737 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42738 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42761 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42777 arg "buffer-update"
42785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42807 arg "master-buffer-view"
42815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42823 \begin_inset space ~
42832 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42841 arg "master-buffer-update"
42849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42855 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42857 \begin_inset space ~
42861 \begin_inset space ~
42870 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42879 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42894 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42895 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42896 Synchronize with Output
42902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42926 View (Other Formats)
42932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42939 arg "update-others"
42947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42954 Update (Other Formats)
42967 \begin_layout Standard
42968 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42972 \begin_layout Subsection
42976 \begin_layout Standard
42977 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42978 \begin_inset space ~
42982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42984 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42988 , the table toolbar
42989 \begin_inset Index idx
42992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43001 \begin_inset space ~
43006 manual and the math macro toolbar
43007 \begin_inset Index idx
43010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43023 \begin_layout Chapter
43024 The Document Settings
43025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43027 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43032 \begin_inset Index idx
43035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43036 Document ! Settings
43044 \begin_layout Standard
43048 \begin_inset space ~
43053 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
43054 is called with the menu
43056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43060 You can save your document settings as default with the
43062 Save as Document Defaults
43064 button in any dialog.
43065 This will create a template named
43069 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
43070 when you create a new document without
43074 \begin_layout Standard
43079 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43080 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43083 \begin_layout Standard
43084 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43085 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43086 to find the one you are looking for.
43087 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43088 the submenus of the dialog.
43090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43094 \begin_inset space \space{}
43098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43105 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43106 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43107 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43110 \begin_layout Section
43114 \begin_layout Standard
43115 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43117 Document classes are described in section
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43124 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43132 \begin_layout Standard
43136 \begin_inset space ~
43141 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43146 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43147 as a layout for a document class.
43148 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43150 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43159 \begin_layout Standard
43160 Some classes use special class options by default.
43161 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43165 and you can decide to use them or not.
43166 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43167 recommended you leave them untouched.
43172 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43173 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43178 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43180 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43186 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43187 \begin_inset Newline newline
43192 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43195 \begin_inset Newline newline
43198 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43199 distribution, see section
43204 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43206 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43219 \begin_layout Standard
43224 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43225 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43226 in the background if the child document
43227 is opened without its master.
43228 This way child documents are always compilable.
43229 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43236 \begin_inset space ~
43244 \begin_layout Standard
43245 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43256 \begin_inset Index idx
43259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43261 -packages ! prettyref
43267 \begin_inset Index idx
43270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43272 -packages ! refstyle
43277 for cross-references, see section
43278 \begin_inset space ~
43282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43284 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43291 \begin_layout Section
43295 \begin_layout Standard
43296 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43297 Please refer to the section
43300 \begin_inset space ~
43308 \begin_inset space ~
43313 manual for details.
43316 \begin_layout Section
43320 \begin_layout Standard
43321 Modules are explained in section
43322 \begin_inset space ~
43326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43328 reference "subsec:Modules"
43335 \begin_layout Section
43339 \begin_layout Standard
43341 \begin_inset space ~
43345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43347 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43354 \begin_layout Section
43358 \begin_layout Standard
43359 The document font settings are described in section
43360 \begin_inset space ~
43364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43366 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43373 \begin_layout Section
43377 \begin_layout Standard
43378 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43390 \begin_inset space ~
43395 and whether it should be a
43398 \begin_inset space ~
43403 can also be specified here.
43406 \begin_layout Standard
43407 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43408 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43409 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43411 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43414 \begin_layout Standard
43417 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43420 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43421 justifies the text on screen.
43422 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43426 \begin_layout Section
43430 \begin_layout Standard
43431 This dialog is described in sections
43432 \begin_inset space ~
43436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43438 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43445 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43452 \begin_layout Section
43456 \begin_layout Standard
43457 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43464 reference "subsec:Margins"
43471 \begin_layout Section
43473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43475 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43480 \begin_inset Index idx
43483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43484 Language ! Encoding
43492 \begin_layout Standard
43493 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43494 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43495 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43497 is always encoded in utf8).
43498 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43499 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43500 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43501 -command is not known for
43502 a particular character).
43505 \begin_layout Standard
43506 If you use the option
43511 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43512 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43513 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43515 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43516 exactly one encoding.
43517 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43520 \begin_layout Standard
43522 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43523 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43524 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43525 installation supports Unicode), choose
43526 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43527 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43528 is quite incomplete, so
43529 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43534 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43535 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43536 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43537 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43538 -commands is not used, because all
43539 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43540 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43541 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43542 , two new alternative engines
43543 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43545 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43547 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43550 \begin_inset space ~
43558 \begin_inset space ~
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43572 \begin_inset space ~
43576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43578 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43583 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43587 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43590 \begin_layout Standard
43594 \begin_inset space ~
43599 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43600 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43610 The possible settings are:
43613 \begin_layout Description
43614 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43616 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43617 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43627 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43634 \begin_layout Description
43635 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43636 format you will use.
43637 In many cases this will be
43642 \begin_inset Index idx
43645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43653 If the newer package
43658 \begin_inset Index idx
43661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43663 -packages ! polyglossia
43668 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43669 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43670 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43672 this package will be used instead of
43679 \begin_layout Description
43681 \begin_inset space ~
43692 would be more appropriate.
43695 \begin_layout Description
43696 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43697 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43701 (for German texts), type in
43704 \begin_inset Newline newline
43709 usepackage{ngerman}
43712 \begin_layout Description
43713 None will not use a language package.
43714 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43717 \begin_layout Standard
43718 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43721 \begin_layout Description
43723 \begin_inset space ~
43727 \begin_inset space ~
43731 \begin_inset space ~
43738 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43744 \begin_inset Index idx
43747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43749 -packages ! inputenc
43755 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43756 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43757 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43761 \begin_layout Description
43762 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43764 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43765 commands, which may result in a big
43766 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43767 -commands are needed.
43770 \begin_layout Description
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43776 \begin_inset space ~
43779 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43782 \begin_layout Description
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43788 \begin_inset space ~
43791 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43794 \begin_layout Description
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43799 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43802 \begin_layout Description
43804 \begin_inset space ~
43808 \begin_inset space ~
43811 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43812 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43815 \begin_layout Description
43817 \begin_inset space ~
43821 \begin_inset space ~
43824 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43828 \begin_layout Description
43830 \begin_inset space ~
43834 \begin_inset space ~
43837 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43838 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43841 \begin_layout Description
43843 \begin_inset space ~
43847 \begin_inset space ~
43851 \begin_inset space ~
43854 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43855 \begin_inset space ~
43861 \begin_layout Description
43863 \begin_inset space ~
43867 \begin_inset space ~
43871 \begin_inset space ~
43874 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43875 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43878 \begin_layout Description
43880 \begin_inset space ~
43884 \begin_inset space ~
43887 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43888 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43889 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43890 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43891 \begin_inset space ~
43895 \begin_inset space ~
43901 \begin_layout Description
43903 \begin_inset space ~
43907 \begin_inset space ~
43910 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43911 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43912 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43914 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43915 \begin_inset space ~
43919 \begin_inset space ~
43925 \begin_layout Description
43927 \begin_inset space ~
43931 \begin_inset space ~
43934 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43937 \begin_layout Description
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43946 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43949 \begin_layout Description
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43955 \begin_inset space ~
43958 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43961 \begin_layout Description
43963 \begin_inset space ~
43966 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43969 \begin_layout Description
43971 \begin_inset space ~
43974 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43977 \begin_layout Description
43979 \begin_inset space ~
43983 \begin_inset space ~
43986 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43989 \begin_layout Description
43991 \begin_inset space ~
43995 \begin_inset space ~
44001 \begin_layout Description
44003 \begin_inset space ~
44007 \begin_inset space ~
44010 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
44013 \begin_layout Description
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44025 \begin_layout Description
44027 \begin_inset space ~
44031 \begin_inset space ~
44034 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44040 \begin_inset Index idx
44043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44050 , when using this, set the document language to
44055 \begin_layout Description
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44064 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44069 , when using this, set the document language to
44072 \begin_inset space ~
44078 \begin_layout Description
44080 \begin_inset space ~
44084 \begin_inset space ~
44087 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44093 \begin_inset Index idx
44096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44098 -packages ! japanese
44103 , when using this, set the document language to
44108 \begin_layout Description
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44114 \begin_inset space ~
44117 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44122 , when using this, set the document language to
44127 \begin_layout Description
44129 \begin_inset space ~
44133 \begin_inset space ~
44136 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44141 , when using this, set the document language to
44146 \begin_layout Description
44148 \begin_inset space ~
44151 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44154 \begin_layout Description
44156 \begin_inset space ~
44160 \begin_inset space ~
44164 \begin_inset space ~
44167 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44170 \begin_layout Description
44172 \begin_inset space ~
44176 \begin_inset space ~
44180 \begin_inset space ~
44183 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44184 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44185 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44188 \begin_layout Description
44190 \begin_inset space ~
44194 \begin_inset space ~
44200 \begin_layout Description
44202 \begin_inset space ~
44206 \begin_inset space ~
44209 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44210 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44213 \begin_layout Description
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44219 \begin_inset space ~
44222 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44228 \begin_inset Index idx
44231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44238 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44241 \begin_layout Description
44243 \begin_inset space ~
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44254 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44261 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44264 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44271 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44272 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44274 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44277 \begin_layout Description
44279 \begin_inset space ~
44283 \begin_inset space ~
44286 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44292 \begin_inset Index idx
44295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44302 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44305 \begin_layout Description
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44310 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44316 \begin_inset Index idx
44319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44321 -packages ! inputenc
44327 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44331 \begin_layout Description
44333 \begin_inset space ~
44337 \begin_inset space ~
44341 \begin_inset space ~
44344 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44345 \begin_inset space ~
44351 \begin_layout Description
44353 \begin_inset space ~
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44361 \begin_inset space ~
44364 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44365 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44366 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44370 \begin_layout Description
44372 \begin_inset space ~
44376 \begin_inset space ~
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44383 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44384 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44387 \begin_layout Section
44389 \begin_inset Index idx
44392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44399 \begin_inset Index idx
44402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44409 \begin_inset Index idx
44412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44413 Color ! Shaded boxes
44419 \begin_inset Index idx
44422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44423 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44431 \begin_layout Standard
44432 Here you can alter the font color for the
44436 (default: black), for
44439 \begin_inset space ~
44444 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44448 (default: white) and for
44451 \begin_inset space ~
44461 sets the color back to the default.
44464 \begin_layout Standard
44465 Clicking any button showing
44473 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44474 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44475 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44476 later more quickly.
44479 \begin_layout Standard
44480 Note, if you change the
44483 \begin_inset space ~
44488 font color and use the option
44491 \begin_inset space ~
44496 in the document settings under
44499 \begin_inset space ~
44504 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44505 \begin_inset space ~
44509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44511 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44518 \begin_layout Standard
44519 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44525 \begin_layout Standard
44529 \begin_inset space ~
44538 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44541 \begin_inset space ~
44544 Code after a forced page break:
44547 \begin_layout Itemize
44548 For the page color:
44549 \begin_inset Newline newline
44556 pagecolor{color name}
44559 \begin_layout Itemize
44560 For the text color:
44561 \begin_inset Newline newline
44571 \begin_layout Standard
44572 You are restricted to one of
44608 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44615 \begin_inset space ~
44621 \begin_inset Newline newline
44624 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44625 names to refer to them:
44628 \begin_layout Itemize
44634 \begin_inset Newline newline
44639 page_backgroundcolor
44642 \begin_layout Itemize
44646 \begin_inset space ~
44652 \begin_inset Newline newline
44660 \begin_layout Itemize
44664 \begin_inset space ~
44670 \begin_inset Newline newline
44678 \begin_layout Itemize
44682 \begin_inset space ~
44688 \begin_inset Newline newline
44696 \begin_layout Standard
44697 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44700 \begin_inset space ~
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44716 \begin_layout Section
44720 \begin_layout Standard
44721 Here you can adjust the
44725 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44729 as described in section
44730 \begin_inset space ~
44734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44736 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44743 \begin_layout Section
44747 \begin_layout Standard
44748 Here you can specify if a
44749 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44752 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44754 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44760 \begin_inset Index idx
44763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44765 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44767 -packages ! biblatex
44779 \begin_inset Index idx
44782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44794 \begin_inset Index idx
44797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44799 -packages ! jurabib
44806 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44807 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44809 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44814 Sectioned bibliography
44816 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44822 \begin_inset Index idx
44825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44827 -packages ! bibtopic
44833 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44835 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44840 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44842 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44846 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44853 for the generation of the bibliography.
44854 For a further description
44855 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44859 \begin_inset space ~
44863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44865 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44872 \begin_layout Section
44876 \begin_layout Standard
44877 Here you can define the
44881 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44883 \begin_inset space ~
44887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44889 reference "sec:Index"
44896 \begin_layout Section
44900 \begin_layout Standard
44901 The PDF properties are explained in section
44902 \begin_inset space ~
44906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44908 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44915 \begin_layout Section
44919 \begin_layout Standard
44920 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44921 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44927 \begin_inset Index idx
44930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44932 -packages ! amsmath
44942 \begin_inset Index idx
44945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44947 -packages ! amssymb
44957 \begin_inset Index idx
44960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44972 \begin_inset Index idx
44975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44987 \begin_inset Index idx
44990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44992 -packages ! mathdots
45002 \begin_inset Index idx
45005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45007 -packages ! mathtools
45017 \begin_inset Index idx
45020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45032 \begin_inset Index idx
45035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45037 -packages ! stackrel
45047 \begin_inset Index idx
45050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45052 -packages ! stmaryrd
45062 \begin_inset Index idx
45065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45067 -packages ! undertilde
45072 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45075 \begin_layout Description
45076 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45077 -errors in formulas,
45078 ensure that you have this enabled.
45081 \begin_layout Description
45082 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45083 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45084 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45088 \begin_layout Description
45089 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45092 \begin_inset space ~
45104 \begin_layout Description
45105 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45108 \begin_inset space ~
45120 \begin_layout Description
45121 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45132 \begin_layout Description
45133 mathtools is used for the math commands
45169 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45176 \begin_layout Description
45177 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45179 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45188 \begin_layout Description
45189 stackrel is used for the math command
45206 \begin_layout Description
45207 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45210 \begin_layout Description
45211 undertilde is used for the math command
45219 Accents for one Character
45228 \begin_layout Section
45232 \begin_layout Standard
45233 The float placement options are described in the section
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45244 \begin_inset space ~
45252 \begin_layout Section
45256 \begin_layout Standard
45257 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45259 Program Code Listings
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45272 \begin_layout Section
45276 \begin_layout Standard
45277 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45285 set to be used and set the
45290 The itemize environment is described in section
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45297 reference "sec:Itemize"
45304 \begin_layout Standard
45305 You can furthermore specify a
45308 \begin_inset space ~
45313 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45314 command of the desired character.
45315 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45322 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45328 \begin_inset space \space{}
45332 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45342 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45343 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45346 \begin_layout Standard
45347 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45355 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45356 -packages in the preamble (menu
45359 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45360 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45363 \begin_inset space ~
45369 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45373 usepackage{textcomp}
45376 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45380 usepackage{amssymb}
45390 \begin_layout Section
45394 \begin_layout Standard
45395 Branches are described in section
45396 \begin_inset space ~
45400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45402 reference "sec:Branches"
45409 \begin_layout Section
45411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45413 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45420 \begin_layout Standard
45421 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45424 \begin_layout Description
45426 \begin_inset space ~
45430 \begin_inset space ~
45433 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45453 View Master Document
45454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45461 Update Master Document
45462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45469 menu or the toolbar.
45470 The default is set in
45472 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45473 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45475 \begin_inset space ~
45478 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45482 \begin_inset space ~
45486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45488 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45495 \begin_layout Description
45497 \begin_inset space ~
45501 \begin_inset space ~
45504 Output settings for the menu
45506 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45514 For a detailed description see section
45516 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45521 \begin_inset space ~
45529 \begin_layout Description
45531 \begin_inset space ~
45535 \begin_inset space ~
45538 Options offers settings for the export format
45546 \begin_inset space ~
45551 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45552 \begin_inset space ~
45555 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45559 \begin_inset space ~
45564 settings are described in detail in section
45566 Math Output in XHTML
45571 \begin_inset space ~
45580 \begin_inset space ~
45584 \begin_inset space ~
45589 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45592 \begin_layout Description
45594 \begin_inset space ~
45599 Save transient properties
45601 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45602 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45603 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45607 \begin_layout Itemize
45608 the activation of change tracking
45611 \begin_layout Itemize
45612 the output of tracked changes
45615 \begin_layout Itemize
45616 the recording of the document directory path.
45619 \begin_layout Standard
45620 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45621 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45625 \begin_layout Section
45633 \begin_layout Standard
45634 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45636 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45638 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45640 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45644 \begin_layout Standard
45645 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45646 -syntax is given in section
45647 \begin_inset space ~
45651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45653 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45660 \begin_layout Chapter
45666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45668 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45673 \begin_inset Index idx
45676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45685 \begin_layout Standard
45686 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45688 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45692 It has the following submenus.
45695 \begin_layout Section
45699 \begin_layout Subsection
45703 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45704 User Interface File
45705 \begin_inset Index idx
45708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45709 Customization ! of toolbars
45715 \begin_inset Index idx
45718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45719 Customization ! of menus
45727 \begin_layout Standard
45728 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45729 interface (ui) file.
45730 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45738 \begin_layout Description
45743 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45746 \begin_layout Description
45753 the menu entries in popup context menus
45756 \begin_layout Description
45761 specifies the toolbar buttons
45764 \begin_layout Standard
45765 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45766 and edit the entries.
45769 \begin_layout Standard
45770 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45782 entries must be finished with an explicit
45807 and in the case of the
45808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45820 The syntax for the entries is:
45823 \begin_layout Standard
45824 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45853 \begin_layout Standard
45855 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45858 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45859 -functions are listed in the menu
45861 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45863 \begin_inset space ~
45871 \begin_layout Standard
45872 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45878 \begin_layout Standard
45879 For example, assuming you use the menu
45881 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45884 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45888 \begin_layout Standard
45889 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45913 \begin_layout Standard
45915 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45930 to have the sixth bookmark.
45933 \begin_layout Standard
45937 \begin_inset space ~
45942 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45943 's toolbar buttons.
45944 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45945 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45948 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45956 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45960 \begin_layout Standard
45963 Enable tool tips in main work area
45965 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45973 \begin_layout Standard
45978 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45979 should display in the menu
45981 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45983 \begin_inset space ~
45991 \begin_layout Subsection
45995 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45999 \begin_layout Standard
46002 Restore window layouts and geometries
46005 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
46006 the last \SpecialChar LyX
46010 \begin_layout Standard
46013 Restore cursor positions
46015 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
46019 \begin_layout Standard
46022 Load opened files from last session
46024 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
46028 \begin_layout Standard
46031 Clear all session information
46033 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
46034 sessions (cursor positions, names
46035 of last opened documents, etc.).
46038 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46042 name "subsec:Backup documents"
46047 \begin_inset Index idx
46050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46059 \begin_layout Standard
46062 Backup original documents when saving
46064 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
46065 it was saved the last time.
46066 It is stored in the
46069 \begin_inset space ~
46075 \begin_inset space ~
46079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46081 reference "sec:Paths"
46085 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46088 \begin_inset space ~
46094 The backup file has the file extension
46095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46109 \begin_layout Standard
46112 Backup documents, every
46114 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46117 \begin_layout Standard
46120 Save documents compressed by default
46122 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46123 \begin_inset space ~
46127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46129 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46134 This applies to newly created documents only.
46135 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46138 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46139 Windows & work area
46142 \begin_layout Standard
46145 Open documents in tabs
46147 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46151 \begin_layout Standard
46156 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46169 reference "sec:Paths"
46173 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46180 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46181 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46182 of \SpecialChar LyX
46184 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46185 instance is created for each file.
46188 \begin_layout Standard
46191 Single close-tab button
46193 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46203 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46204 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46206 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
46207 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46214 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46222 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46223 before the change takes effect.
46231 \begin_layout Standard
46236 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46238 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46240 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46244 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46245 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46246 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46249 \begin_layout Subsection
46251 \begin_inset Index idx
46254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46263 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46270 \begin_layout Standard
46271 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46275 \begin_layout Standard
46276 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46284 This section only deals with the fonts
46288 the \SpecialChar LyX
46290 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46294 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46305 \begin_layout Standard
46306 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46323 (depends on the system) as its
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46342 \begin_layout Standard
46343 You can change the font size with the
46350 \begin_layout Standard
46355 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46360 points have the size of 1
46361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46365 \begin_inset space ~
46369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46371 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46376 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46381 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46382 \begin_inset space ~
46386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46388 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46395 \begin_layout Standard
46398 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46400 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46401 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46402 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46403 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46404 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46406 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46407 \begin_inset space ~
46413 \begin_layout Subsection
46415 \begin_inset Index idx
46418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46419 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46426 \begin_inset Index idx
46429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46438 \begin_layout Standard
46439 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46440 by choosing an item in the
46441 list and selecting the
46448 \begin_layout Standard
46449 By checking the option
46453 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46456 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46457 \begin_inset space ~
46461 \begin_inset space ~
46466 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46469 \begin_layout Subsection
46471 \begin_inset Index idx
46474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46483 \begin_layout Standard
46484 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46488 \begin_layout Standard
46493 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46494 This feature is described in section
46495 \begin_inset space ~
46499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46501 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46508 \begin_layout Standard
46509 Checking the option
46512 \begin_inset space ~
46516 \begin_inset space ~
46520 \begin_inset space ~
46525 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46528 \begin_layout Section
46530 \begin_inset Index idx
46533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46542 \begin_layout Subsection
46546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46550 \begin_layout Standard
46553 Cursor follows scrollbar
46555 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46559 \begin_layout Standard
46560 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46561 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46562 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46565 \begin_layout Standard
46568 Scroll below end of document
46570 is self-explanatory.
46573 \begin_layout Standard
46574 In \SpecialChar LyX
46575 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46582 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46584 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46585 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46588 \begin_layout Standard
46591 Sort environments alphabetically
46593 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46596 \begin_layout Standard
46599 Group environments by their category
46601 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46604 \begin_layout Standard
46609 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46624 \begin_layout Standard
46625 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46630 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46631 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46635 \begin_layout Subsection
46637 \begin_inset Index idx
46640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46647 \begin_inset Index idx
46650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46651 Settings ! Shortcuts
46659 \begin_layout Standard
46664 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46666 Several binding files are available, among them:
46669 \begin_layout Description
46670 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46673 \begin_layout Description
46674 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46686 \begin_layout Description
46687 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46698 \begin_layout Standard
46699 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46704 , and binding files for special languages.
46705 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46710 \begin_inset space \space{}
46714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46722 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46723 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46724 will try to use the appropriate binding
46728 \begin_layout Standard
46729 Some binding files, like
46733 , only have a limited scope.
46734 When looking at the end of the file
46738 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46741 \begin_layout Standard
46745 \begin_inset space ~
46749 \begin_inset space ~
46754 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46755 in the selected key binding file.
46758 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46762 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46767 \begin_inset Index idx
46770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46771 Key Bindings ! Editing
46779 \begin_layout Standard
46780 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46781 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46782 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46783 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46786 Show key-bindings containing
46789 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46790 Insert there for example as keyword
46791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46798 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46799 functions that contain
46800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46808 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46809 All \SpecialChar LyX
46810 functions are also listed in the file
46815 that you will find in the
46822 \begin_layout Standard
46823 For example, to add the shortcut
46831 , select the function and press the
46836 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46837 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46840 \begin_layout Standard
46841 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46842 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46844 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46845 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46847 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46852 \begin_layout Standard
46853 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46856 \begin_layout Standard
46857 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46859 The syntax of the entries is:
46862 \begin_layout Standard
46868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46887 \begin_layout Subsection
46889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46891 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46896 \begin_inset Index idx
46899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46906 \begin_inset Index idx
46909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46910 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46918 \begin_layout Standard
46919 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46920 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46921 provides keyboard maps.
46922 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46923 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46926 \begin_inset space ~
46930 \begin_inset space ~
46935 and select the keyboard map file named
46942 \begin_layout Standard
46951 keyboard map and, if you use the
46955 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46958 arg "keymap-primary"
46964 arg "keymap-secondary"
46967 respectively or toggle between them with
46970 arg "keymap-toggle"
46976 \begin_layout Standard
46977 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46985 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46994 \begin_layout Standard
46995 You can also specify the mouse
46997 Wheel scrolling speed
47000 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
47004 Middle mouse button pasting
47006 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
47007 inserts the content of the clipboard.
47010 \begin_layout Standard
47018 \begin_inset space ~
47022 \begin_inset space ~
47027 you can select a key for zooming.
47028 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
47031 \begin_layout Subsection
47035 \begin_layout Standard
47036 Input completion is described in section
47037 \begin_inset space ~
47041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47043 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
47050 \begin_layout Section
47052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47059 \begin_inset Index idx
47062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47069 \begin_inset Index idx
47072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47081 \begin_layout Standard
47082 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47083 are normally determined during
47085 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47088 \begin_layout Description
47090 \begin_inset space ~
47093 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47094 's working directory.
47095 It is the default when you
47106 \begin_inset space ~
47114 \begin_layout Description
47116 \begin_inset space ~
47119 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47121 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47123 \begin_inset space ~
47127 \begin_inset space ~
47135 \begin_layout Description
47137 \begin_inset space ~
47140 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47146 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47150 \begin_inset Newline newline
47154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47166 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47167 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47175 \begin_layout Description
47177 \begin_inset space ~
47181 \begin_inset Index idx
47184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47190 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47191 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47192 \begin_inset space ~
47196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47198 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47206 will be used to save the backups.
47207 \begin_inset Newline newline
47210 Backup files have the ending
47211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47221 \begin_layout Description
47223 \begin_inset space ~
47226 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47227 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47229 \begin_inset Newline newline
47236 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47242 You can edit this file with the program
47251 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47252 in its preferences under
47255 \begin_inset space ~
47261 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47266 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47268 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47269 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47275 and \SpecialChar LyX
47276 need to be running the same time.
47277 \begin_inset Newline newline
47280 The pipe is also used for the
47284 feature, see section
47285 \begin_inset space ~
47289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47291 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47296 \begin_inset Newline newline
47299 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47300 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47301 \begin_inset Newline newline
47317 \begin_layout Description
47319 \begin_inset space ~
47322 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47325 \begin_layout Description
47327 \begin_inset space ~
47330 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47331 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47332 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47335 \begin_layout Description
47337 \begin_inset space ~
47340 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47346 You only need to specify it if you are using
47350 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47352 For \SpecialChar LyX
47357 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47361 \begin_layout Description
47363 \begin_inset space ~
47366 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47367 When \SpecialChar LyX
47368 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47369 to find it on the system.
47370 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47372 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47381 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47382 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47385 \begin_layout Description
47387 \begin_inset space ~
47390 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47391 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47392 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47393 code or in the document
47395 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47397 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47398 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47399 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47400 scanned for the input files.
47401 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47402 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47404 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47405 compilation may fail for some documents.
47408 \begin_layout Section
47412 \begin_layout Standard
47413 Here you can insert your
47422 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47430 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47434 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47437 \begin_layout Section
47439 \begin_inset Index idx
47442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47443 Language ! Settings
47449 \begin_inset Index idx
47452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47453 Settings ! Language
47461 \begin_layout Subsection
47463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47465 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47472 \begin_layout Description
47474 \begin_inset space ~
47478 \begin_inset space ~
47481 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47483 You can find its actual translation status here:
47484 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47486 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47494 \begin_layout Description
47496 \begin_inset space ~
47499 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47500 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47501 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47502 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47519 The most widespread language package is
47524 \begin_inset Index idx
47527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47534 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47536 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47537 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47538 come with the alternative
47544 \begin_inset Index idx
47547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47549 -packages ! polyglossia
47554 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47555 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47561 The available selections are described in section
47562 \begin_inset space ~
47566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47568 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47575 \begin_layout Description
47577 \begin_inset space ~
47580 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47581 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47582 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47583 An example is the start command
47589 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47591 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47595 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47611 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47616 \begin_layout Description
47618 \begin_inset space ~
47626 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47627 command toggles the package on and off.
47630 \begin_layout Description
47632 \begin_inset space ~
47636 \begin_inset space ~
47639 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47643 \begin_layout Description
47645 \begin_inset space ~
47649 \begin_inset space ~
47652 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47656 \begin_layout Description
47658 \begin_inset space ~
47662 \begin_inset space ~
47665 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47666 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47667 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47669 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47676 \begin_layout Description
47678 \begin_inset space ~
47681 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47683 When this option is not set, the
47686 \begin_inset space ~
47691 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47693 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47696 \begin_inset space ~
47704 \begin_layout Description
47706 \begin_inset space ~
47712 \begin_inset space ~
47718 When it is not set, the
47721 \begin_inset space ~
47726 is set to the end of the document.
47729 \begin_layout Description
47731 \begin_inset space ~
47735 \begin_inset space ~
47738 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47739 language will be underlined in blue.
47742 \begin_layout Description
47744 \begin_inset space ~
47748 \begin_inset space ~
47751 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47752 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47755 \begin_layout Description
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47760 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47761 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47762 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47763 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47766 \begin_layout Subsection
47770 \begin_layout Standard
47771 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47772 \begin_inset space ~
47776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47778 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47785 \begin_layout Section
47789 \begin_layout Subsection
47791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47793 name "subsec:General-output"
47800 \begin_layout Description
47802 \begin_inset space ~
47805 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47807 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47809 \begin_inset space ~
47815 For a detailed description see section
47817 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47822 \begin_inset space ~
47830 \begin_layout Description
47832 \begin_inset space ~
47835 Options Options for the program
47839 that is used for the export format
47844 \begin_inset space ~
47848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47850 reference "subsec:Export"
47855 Possible options are listed in the
47860 \begin_inset Newline newline
47864 \begin_inset Flex URL
47867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47869 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47879 \begin_layout Description
47881 \begin_inset space ~
47885 \begin_inset space ~
47888 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47891 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47892 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47894 \begin_inset space ~
47900 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47903 \begin_layout Description
47905 \begin_inset space ~
47909 \begin_inset Index idx
47912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47919 \begin_inset Index idx
47922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47923 Settings ! Date format
47928 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47929 \begin_inset Newline newline
47933 \begin_inset Flex URL
47936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47938 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47944 \begin_inset Newline newline
47947 For example the format
47948 \begin_inset Newline newline
47952 \begin_inset Newline newline
47955 prints the date as day/month/year.
47958 \begin_layout Description
47960 \begin_inset space ~
47964 \begin_inset space ~
47967 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47968 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47971 \begin_layout Subsection
47977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47979 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47984 \begin_inset Index idx
47987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47988 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47997 \begin_layout Description
47999 \begin_inset space ~
48007 \begin_inset space ~
48011 \begin_inset space ~
48014 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
48019 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
48040 are used for Cyrillic.
48041 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
48042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48054 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
48056 sets up in the background.
48057 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
48060 \begin_layout Description
48062 \begin_inset space ~
48066 \begin_inset space ~
48070 \begin_inset space ~
48074 \begin_inset space ~
48077 options They only have an effect when the program
48081 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48084 \begin_layout Standard
48085 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48086 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48087 manuals of the applications.
48090 \begin_layout Description
48092 \begin_inset space ~
48095 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48096 \begin_inset space ~
48100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48102 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48109 \begin_layout Description
48111 \begin_inset space ~
48114 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48115 \begin_inset space ~
48119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48121 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48128 \begin_layout Description
48130 \begin_inset space ~
48133 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48134 \begin_inset space ~
48138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48140 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48147 \begin_layout Description
48153 \begin_inset space ~
48156 command Command for the program
48158 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48161 that is described in the section
48163 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48168 Additional Features
48173 \begin_layout Standard
48174 There are additionally the following options:
48177 \begin_layout Description
48179 \begin_inset space ~
48183 \begin_inset space ~
48187 \begin_inset space ~
48191 \begin_inset space ~
48196 \begin_inset space ~
48199 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48217 to separate folders.
48218 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48220 \begin_inset Index idx
48223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48230 \begin_inset Index idx
48233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48242 \begin_layout Description
48244 \begin_inset space ~
48248 \begin_inset space ~
48252 \begin_inset space ~
48256 \begin_inset space ~
48260 \begin_inset space ~
48264 \begin_inset space ~
48267 changes Removes all manually set
48273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48274 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48276 \begin_inset space ~
48281 dialog when changing the document class.
48284 \begin_layout Section
48286 \begin_inset space ~
48290 \begin_inset Index idx
48293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48302 \begin_layout Subsection
48304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48306 name "subsec:Converters"
48311 \begin_inset Index idx
48314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48323 \begin_layout Standard
48324 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48325 from one format to another.
48326 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48327 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48334 \begin_inset space ~
48339 field and press the
48344 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48348 \begin_inset space ~
48353 drop-down list, modify the
48357 field and press the
48364 \begin_layout Standard
48367 Converter File Cache
48373 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48375 Maximum Age (in days
48378 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48379 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48382 \begin_layout Standard
48383 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48384 definition, is described in the section
48395 \begin_layout Subsection
48397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48399 name "sec:File-Formats"
48404 \begin_inset Index idx
48407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48414 \begin_inset Index idx
48417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48426 \begin_layout Standard
48427 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48437 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48440 \begin_layout Standard
48441 You can also define the
48443 Default output format
48445 that is used when you use
48447 View, Update, View Master Document
48451 Update Master Document
48457 menu or the toolbar.
48460 \begin_layout Standard
48461 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48472 \begin_layout Standard
48473 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48475 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48476 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48477 This is done by specifying a
48482 More about this is described in the section
48493 \begin_layout Chapter
48494 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48496 \begin_inset Index idx
48499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48508 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48515 \begin_layout Standard
48517 \begin_inset space ~
48521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48523 reference "tab:Units"
48527 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48528 and used in this documentation.
48531 \begin_layout Standard
48532 \begin_inset Float table
48538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48539 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48557 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48565 \begin_inset Tabular
48566 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48567 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48569 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48570 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48776 scaled point (65536
48777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48855 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48892 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48928 % of original image width
48933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49244 \begin_layout Chapter
49246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49248 name "chap:Credits"
49255 \begin_layout Standard
49256 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49257 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49260 \begin_layout Itemize
49263 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49266 \begin_layout Itemize
49272 \begin_layout Itemize
49278 \begin_layout Itemize
49284 \begin_layout Itemize
49290 \begin_layout Itemize
49296 \begin_layout Itemize
49302 \begin_layout Itemize
49308 \begin_layout Itemize
49311 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49314 \begin_layout Itemize
49320 \begin_layout Itemize
49326 \begin_layout Itemize
49332 \begin_layout Itemize
49338 \begin_layout Itemize
49344 \begin_layout Itemize
49350 \begin_layout Itemize
49356 \begin_layout Itemize
49362 \begin_layout Itemize
49363 The \SpecialChar LyX
49365 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49375 \begin_layout Standard
49376 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49379 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49386 \begin_layout Bibliography
49387 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49388 LatexCommand bibitem
49395 The \SpecialChar LyX
49397 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49400 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49406 \begin_inset Newline newline
49410 \begin_inset Flex URL
49413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49415 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49423 \begin_layout Bibliography
49424 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49425 LatexCommand bibitem
49426 key "latexcompanion"
49431 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49433 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49434 Companion Second Edition.
49437 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49440 \begin_layout Bibliography
49441 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49442 LatexCommand bibitem
49448 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49451 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49455 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49458 \begin_layout Bibliography
49459 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49460 LatexCommand bibitem
49469 : A Document Preparation System.
49472 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49475 \begin_layout Bibliography
49476 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49477 LatexCommand bibitem
49487 The \SpecialChar TeX
49491 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49494 \begin_layout Bibliography
49495 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49496 LatexCommand bibitem
49502 The \SpecialChar TeX
49504 \begin_inset Newline newline
49508 \begin_inset Flex URL
49511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49513 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49521 \begin_layout Bibliography
49522 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49523 LatexCommand bibitem
49529 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49531 \begin_inset Newline newline
49535 \begin_inset Flex URL
49538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49540 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49548 \begin_layout Bibliography
49549 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49550 LatexCommand bibitem
49557 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49559 name "Documentation"
49560 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49567 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49571 \begin_inset Newline newline
49575 \begin_inset Flex URL
49578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49580 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49588 \begin_layout Bibliography
49589 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49590 LatexCommand bibitem
49597 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49599 name "Documentation"
49600 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49605 how to use the program
49607 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49611 \begin_inset Newline newline
49615 \begin_inset Flex URL
49618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49620 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49626 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884806
49630 \begin_layout Bibliography
49632 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884882
49633 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49634 LatexCommand bibitem
49641 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49644 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49654 \begin_inset Newline newline
49658 \begin_inset Flex URL
49661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49663 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884888
49665 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49675 \begin_layout Bibliography
49676 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49677 LatexCommand bibitem
49684 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49686 name "Documentation"
49687 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49697 \begin_inset Newline newline
49701 \begin_inset Flex URL
49704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49706 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49714 \begin_layout Bibliography
49715 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49716 LatexCommand bibitem
49717 key "makeindex-man"
49723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49726 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49736 \begin_inset Newline newline
49740 \begin_inset Flex URL
49743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49745 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49753 \begin_layout Bibliography
49754 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49755 LatexCommand bibitem
49762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49764 name "Documentation"
49765 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49775 \begin_inset Newline newline
49779 \begin_inset Flex URL
49782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49784 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49792 \begin_layout Bibliography
49793 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49794 LatexCommand bibitem
49801 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49803 name "Documentation"
49804 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49809 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49811 \begin_inset Newline newline
49815 \begin_inset Flex URL
49818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49820 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49828 \begin_layout Bibliography
49829 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49830 LatexCommand bibitem
49837 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49839 name "Documentation"
49840 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49845 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49851 \begin_inset Index idx
49854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49856 -packages ! caption
49862 \begin_inset Newline newline
49866 \begin_inset Flex URL
49869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49871 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49879 \begin_layout Bibliography
49880 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49881 LatexCommand bibitem
49888 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49890 name "Documentation"
49891 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49896 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49902 \begin_inset Index idx
49905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49907 -packages ! enumitem
49913 \begin_inset Newline newline
49917 \begin_inset Flex URL
49920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49922 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49930 \begin_layout Bibliography
49931 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49932 LatexCommand bibitem
49939 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49941 name "Documentation"
49942 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49947 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49953 \begin_inset Index idx
49956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49958 -packages ! fancyhdr
49964 \begin_inset Newline newline
49968 \begin_inset Flex URL
49971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49973 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49981 \begin_layout Bibliography
49982 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49983 LatexCommand bibitem
49990 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49992 name "Documentation"
49993 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49998 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50004 \begin_inset Index idx
50007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50009 -packages ! hyperref
50015 \begin_inset Newline newline
50019 \begin_inset Flex URL
50022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50024 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
50032 \begin_layout Bibliography
50033 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50034 LatexCommand bibitem
50041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50043 name "Documentation"
50044 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
50049 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50055 \begin_inset Index idx
50058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50060 -packages ! nomencl
50066 \begin_inset Newline newline
50070 \begin_inset Flex URL
50073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50075 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50083 \begin_layout Bibliography
50084 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50085 LatexCommand bibitem
50092 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50094 name "Documentation"
50095 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50100 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50106 \begin_inset Index idx
50109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50111 -packages ! prettyref
50117 \begin_inset Newline newline
50121 \begin_inset Flex URL
50124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50126 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50134 \begin_layout Bibliography
50135 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50136 LatexCommand bibitem
50143 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50145 name "Documentation"
50146 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50151 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50157 \begin_inset Index idx
50160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50162 -packages ! refstyle
50168 \begin_inset Newline newline
50172 \begin_inset Flex URL
50175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50177 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50185 \begin_layout Bibliography
50186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50187 LatexCommand bibitem
50194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50197 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50202 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50204 \begin_inset Newline newline
50208 \begin_inset Flex URL
50211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50213 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50221 \begin_layout Bibliography
50222 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50223 LatexCommand bibitem
50230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50233 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50238 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50240 \begin_inset Newline newline
50244 \begin_inset Flex URL
50247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50249 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50257 \begin_layout Bibliography
50258 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50259 LatexCommand bibitem
50266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50269 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50274 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50275 for Cyrillic languages:
50276 \begin_inset Newline newline
50280 \begin_inset Flex URL
50283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50285 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50293 \begin_layout Bibliography
50294 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50295 LatexCommand bibitem
50302 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50305 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50310 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50312 \begin_inset Newline newline
50316 \begin_inset Flex URL
50319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50321 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50329 \begin_layout Bibliography
50330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50331 LatexCommand bibitem
50338 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50341 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50346 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50348 \begin_inset Newline newline
50352 \begin_inset Flex URL
50355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50357 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50365 \begin_layout Bibliography
50366 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50367 LatexCommand bibitem
50374 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50377 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50382 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50384 \begin_inset Newline newline
50388 \begin_inset Flex URL
50391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50393 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50401 \begin_layout Bibliography
50402 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50403 LatexCommand bibitem
50410 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50413 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50418 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50420 \begin_inset Newline newline
50424 \begin_inset Flex URL
50427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50429 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50437 \begin_layout Bibliography
50438 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50439 LatexCommand bibitem
50446 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50449 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50454 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50456 \begin_inset Newline newline
50460 \begin_inset Flex URL
50463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50465 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50473 \begin_layout Bibliography
50474 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50475 LatexCommand bibitem
50482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50485 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50490 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50492 \begin_inset Newline newline
50496 \begin_inset Flex URL
50499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50501 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50509 \begin_layout Bibliography
50510 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50511 LatexCommand bibitem
50518 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50521 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50526 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50528 \begin_inset Newline newline
50532 \begin_inset Flex URL
50535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50537 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50545 \begin_layout Bibliography
50546 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50547 LatexCommand bibitem
50554 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50557 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50562 about new features in
50568 \begin_inset Newline newline
50572 \begin_inset Flex URL
50575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50577 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50585 \begin_layout Standard
50586 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50620 \begin_inset Note Note
50623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50630 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50631 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50632 bibliography is the second one:
50640 \begin_layout Standard
50641 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50642 LatexCommand bibtex
50643 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50644 options "biblio/alphadin"
50651 \begin_layout Standard
50652 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50656 \begin_layout Standard
50657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50658 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50664 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50665 LatexCommand printindex